DRAKE | 4000 series II | User guide | DRAKE 4000 series II User guide

4000 Series II
User Guide
Issue 1.4
June 2006
4000 Series II
Thank you for purchasing this product; we hope it will provide many years of reliable and rewarding
service.
We would be pleased to hear from you if you have any difficulties, comments or suggestions related to
this product, the user documentation or the support service which we offer. Please feel free to contact
us by e-mail, postal mail or telephone.
Please also visit our website whic is continually being enhanced to offer increased levels of information.
You can find us at http://www.vitecgroupcomms.com/
Vitec Group Communications Limited
7400 Beach Drive
Cambridge Research Park
Cambridgeshire
United Kingdom
CB5 9TP
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page i
Panel User Guide
Page ii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
General Enquiries:
EMEA Sales:
Tel: +44 (0) 1223 815000
Fax: +44 (0) 1223 815001
email: vgc.uk@vitecgroup.com
New
Orders:
Tel: +44 (0) 1223 815000
Fax: +44 (0) 1223 815001
email: customerservicesUK@vitegroup.com
Support:
Tel: +49 (0) 40 6688 4040 (day)
Tel: +49 (0) 40 6688 4041 (night)
Fax: +49 (0) 40 6688 3055 (repairs)
vitec.support@avc.de (repairs)
vitec.support@avc.de (support)
http://www.avc.de/if/vitec (repairs booking)
Asia Pacific and
South/Central
America Sales:
New Orders:
Maria Gonzalez
International Export Coordination
Tel: +1 510 496 6655
Fax: +1 510 496 6699
email: maria.gonzalez@vitecgroup.com
Amado Bautista
International Export Coordination
Tel +1 510 496 6623
Fax: +1 510 496 6699
email: amado.bautista@vitecgroup.com
Jon Ernst
Manager
Tel: +1 510 496 6634
Fax: +1 510 496 6699
email: jon.ernst@vitecgroup.com
Support
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Richard Spicer
Product Technical Support
Tel: +1 510 496 6662 (office)
Tel: +1 510 381 5001 (mobile)
Fax: +1 510 496 6699
email: richard.spicer@vitecgroup.com
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page iii
Panel User Guide
Page iv
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Policy Statement
Vitec Group Communications has a policy of continuous improvement of both products and
documentation and reserves the right modify product specifications and characteristics without notice,
at any time.
Vitec Group Communications has endeavoured to ensure that information, details and descriptions set
out in this document are correct at the time of publication. Where alterations have been made to the
product, we will endeavour to produce appropriate additional information such as supplementary
documents, changes to the website or re-issued copies of a CDROM.
Vitec Group Communications is, however, unable to guarantee that no changes have taken place to the
specification or characteristics of this product after the publication of this document. Vitec Group
Communications shall not be liable for any loss or damage whatsoever arising from the use of any
information, errors or omissions in this document or any use of the product.
European Union Declaration of
Conformity
Vitec Group Communications declares that the electronic equipment has been manufactured in
conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 50081-1:1992
Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic
emission standard.
Residential, commercial and light industry.
BS EN 50082-1:1998
Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic
immunity standard.
Residential, commercial and light industry.
BS EN 60950:1992
Safety of information technology equipment.
Trademarks
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
© 2006 All rights reserved. Neither the whole, nor any part of the information contained herein, nor in
the products described in this guide, may be adapted or reproduced in any material form except with the
prior written approval of Vitec Group Communications.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page v
Panel User Guide
Page vi
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Revision History
Issue
Date
Notes
1.0
November 1999
Initial Issue
1.1
July 2000
Updates
1.2
February 2005
Revisions for new equipment and change to company name
1.3
November 2005
Corrections and updates
1.4
June 2006
Updates for new panels
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page vii
Panel User Guide
Page viii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Warnings and Cautions
GENERAL WARNING
Electrical shock can cause severe personal injury or death. All major units of
this equipment are powered by mains voltage. Unless specifically advised
otherwise, DISCONNECT mains supply before carrying out any maintenance
or repair tasks.
This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe
precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices when carrying out
any maintenance or repair tasks.
Where appropriate, warnings and cautions appear in the text with the following meanings:
WARNING. Given where carrying out an instruction can cause risk of injury or death.
CAUTION. Given where carrying out an instruction can cause risk of damage to the equipment.
WARNING - EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT
This equipment must be properly earthed.
The mains plug must be connected in accordance with the following code:
•
BLUE - Neutral (N)
•
BROWN - Live (L)
•
GREEN/YELLOW - Earth (E)
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
• The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or is BLACK.
• The write which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or is RED.
• The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter E or the symbol
CAUTION - ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTION
When carrying out any maintenance or repair taks on this equipment all personnel should ensure that
appropriate grounding equipment is used and checked before commencing work on the equipment.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are marked with the symbol
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page ix
Panel User Guide
Page x
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
ADC
Analogue to Digital Converter
ADM
Assignment, Diagnostics and Monitoring
BNC
Standard co-axial video connector
CAT5
Cable standard for high speed data communications (e.g. 100Base-TX)
CODEC
Coder/Decoder
CMAPSi
Configuration and Master Assignment Programming System integrated
CSU
Central Switching Unit
DAC
Digital to Analogue Converter
DAK
Direct Access Key
dB
Decibel
DPDT
Double-Pole-Double-Throw
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
FLASH RAM
Low voltage electrically erasable and programmable read-only memory.
GPI
General Purpose Interface
GPSF
General Purpose Special Function
Howlround
Distorted audio - due to feedback of original signal in close proximity.
I/O
Input / Output
I/P
Input
IFB
Interruptible Foldback
Local Programming
Modifying the DAK assignments via the Intelligent Control Panel SOFT Mode
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Listen Route
An audio route to the Control Panel from a
source. The audio is normally heard on the Control Panel's Loudspeaker or Headset.
LS
Loudspeaker
Mb
Megabyte
MHz
Megahertz
N/C
Normally Closed
N/O
Normally Open
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page xi
NID
Non Intrusive Download
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
O/P
Output
PCB
Printed Circuit Board
Pot.
Potentiometer
PSU
Power Supply Unit
RAM
Random Access Memory
RCU
Rear Connector Unit
RJ45
Standard connector for data communications
(used with CAT5 cabling for comms. between
the matrix and control panels)
RMS
Root Mean Square
RU
Standard Rack Unit (19 inches wide x 1.75
inches high or 482.6mm x 44.45mm)
Side Tone
Side tone is the audio, which is heard in the
Headset's earpiece, which is generated by the
headset microphone. This allows the operators
to hear themselves when using headsets.
SPDT
Single-Pole-Double-Throw (switch / relay action)
SPST
Single-Pole-Single-Throw (switch / relay action)
TA
Terminal Adaptor
Talkback
A Broadcast term referring to intercom systems
in which 4-wire comms. are used.
Talk Route
An audio route from the Control Panel to another
destination. The audio is normally generated
from the Control Panel's main microphone or
Headset microphone.
TBU
Telephone Balance Unit
VOX
Voice Operated Switch
XLR
Audio industry standard connector
Panel User Guide
Page xii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Consult the named Vitec Group Communications document for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable options.
Tips given.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page xiii
Panel User Guide
Page xiv
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................1
2 Control Panel Overview .........................................................................................2
3 Control Panel Descriptions ...................................................................................2
3.1 PD4215R (revised) - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU) ....................................................... 3
3.2 PD4215R - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU) ...................................................................... 3
3.2.1 Microphone Socket ............................................................................................................. 4
3.2.2 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................... 4
3.2.3 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................... 5
3.2.4 Listen Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 5
3.2.5 PD4215R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ....................................................................... 5
3.2.6 Designation Strip ................................................................................................................ 6
3.2.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ............................................................................................. 6
3.2.8 Main Volume Control .......................................................................................................... 6
3.2.9 Loudspeaker ....................................................................................................................... 6
3.2.10 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5) ..................................................................................... 6
3.2.11 Headset Select Pushbutton .............................................................................................. 6
3.2.12 Reply Key ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.2.13 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 7
3.3 PD4215 - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU) ......................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Microphone Socket ............................................................................................................. 8
3.3.2 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 10
3.3.4 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 10
3.3.5 PD4215 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ........................................................................ 10
3.3.6 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 10
3.3.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 10
3.3.8 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 10
3.3.9 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 10
3.3.10 Headset Socket (DIN 5) .................................................................................................. 11
3.3.11 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 11
3.3.12 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 11
3.3.13 Auxiliary Volume Control ................................................................................................ 11
3.4 PD4217 - Intelligent Control Panel (1RU) ................................................................... 12
3.4.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 12
3.4.2 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 12
3.4.3 Soft Pushbutton ................................................................................................................ 14
3.4.4 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 14
3.4.5 Rotary LED Display .......................................................................................................... 14
3.4.6 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 14
3.4.7 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 14
3.4.8 PD4217 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ........................................................................ 14
3.4.9 Alphanumeric LED Display ............................................................................................... 14
3.4.10 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.11 Headset Socket (DIN 5) .................................................................................................. 15
3.4.12 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 15
3.4.13 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 15
3.4.14 Level Control Pushbutton ............................................................................................... 15
3.4.15 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 15
3.4.16 Rotary Encoder ............................................................................................................... 15
3.4.17 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 16
3.5 PD4224R - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU) ................................................................ 17
3.5.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 18
3.5.2 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 19
Panel User Guide
Page i
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.5.3 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 20
3.5.4 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 20
3.5.5 PD4224R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ..................................................................... 20
3.5.6 Alphanumeric Display ....................................................................................................... 20
3.5.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 20
3.5.8 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 20
3.5.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 20
3.5.10 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 21
3.5.11 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5) ................................................................................... 21
3.5.12 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 21
3.5.13 Info Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 21
3.5.14 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 22
3.5.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................... 22
3.5.16 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 22
3.5.17 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 22
3.5.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 23
3.5.19 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 23
3.6 PD4224 - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU) ................................................................... 24
3.6.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 24
3.6.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5) .................................................................................................... 25
3.6.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 25
3.6.4 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 26
3.6.5 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 26
3.6.6 PD4224 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ........................................................................ 26
3.6.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display ............................................................................................... 26
3.6.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 26
3.6.9 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 27
3.6.10 Auxiliary Volume Control ................................................................................................ 27
3.6.11 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 27
3.6.12 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 27
3.6.13 Info Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 27
3.6.14 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 28
3.6.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................... 28
3.6.16 Contrast Control .............................................................................................................. 28
3.6.17 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 29
3.6.18 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 29
3.6.19 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 29
3.6.20 Level Control Pushbutton ............................................................................................... 29
3.6.21 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 29
3.7 PD4225R - Router Control Panel (2RU) ..................................................................... 30
3.7.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 30
3.7.2 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 31
3.7.3 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 32
3.7.4 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 32
3.7.5 PD4225R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ..................................................................... 32
3.7.6 Alphanumeric Display ....................................................................................................... 32
3.7.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 32
3.7.8 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 32
3.7.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 32
3.7.10 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 33
3.7.11 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5) ................................................................................... 33
3.7.12 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 33
3.7.13 Info Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 33
3.7.14 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 34
3.7.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................... 34
3.7.16 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 35
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page ii
3.7.17 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 35
3.7.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 35
3.7.19 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 35
3.8 PD4225 - Router Control Panel (2RU) ....................................................................... 36
3.8.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 36
3.8.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5) .................................................................................................... 37
3.8.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 37
3.8.4 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 38
3.8.5 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 38
3.8.6 PD4224 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ........................................................................ 38
3.8.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display ............................................................................................... 38
3.8.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 38
3.8.9 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 39
3.8.10 Auxiliary Volume Control ................................................................................................ 39
3.8.11 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 39
3.8.12 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 39
3.8.13 Info Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 39
3.8.14 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 40
3.8.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................... 40
3.8.16 Contrast Control .............................................................................................................. 40
3.8.17 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 41
3.8.18 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 41
3.8.19 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 41
3.8.20 Level Control Pushbutton ............................................................................................... 41
3.8.21 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 41
3.9 PD4226R - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU) .................................................................... 42
3.9.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 42
3.9.2 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5) ..................................................................................... 43
3.9.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 43
3.9.4 PD4226R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ..................................................................... 44
3.9.5 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 44
3.9.6 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 44
3.9.7 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 44
3.9.8 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 44
3.9.9 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 44
3.9.10 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 45
3.9.11 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 45
3.9.12 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 45
3.10 PD4226 - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU) ..................................................................... 46
3.10.1 Microphone Socket ......................................................................................................... 46
3.10.2 Headset Socket .............................................................................................................. 47
3.10.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 47
3.10.4 Talk Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 48
3.10.5 Listen Tally LED .............................................................................................................. 48
3.10.6 PD4226 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ...................................................................... 48
3.10.7 Designation Strip ............................................................................................................ 48
3.10.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 48
3.10.9 Main Volume Control ...................................................................................................... 48
3.10.10 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 48
3.10.11 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 49
3.10.12 Headset Select Pushbutton .......................................................................................... 49
3.10.13 Reply Key ..................................................................................................................... 49
3.10.14 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 49
3.11 PD4294R - Desktop Control Panel ........................................................................... 50
3.11.1 Microphone Socket ......................................................................................................... 50
3.11.2 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5) ................................................................................... 51
Panel User Guide
Page iii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.11.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 51
3.11.4 Talk Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 52
3.11.5 Listen Tally LED .............................................................................................................. 52
3.11.6 PD4294R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ................................................................... 52
3.11.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display ............................................................................................. 52
3.11.8 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 52
3.11.9 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 52
3.11.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................... 52
3.11.11 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 53
3.11.12 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 53
3.11.13 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 53
3.11.14 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 54
3.11.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................. 54
3.11.16 Reply Key ..................................................................................................................... 54
3.11.17 Level Control Pushbutton ............................................................................................. 55
3.11.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 55
3.11.19 Rotary Level Control ..................................................................................................... 55
3.11.20 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 55
3.11.21 Contrast Control ............................................................................................................ 55
3.12 PD4294 - Desktop Control Panel ............................................................................. 56
3.12.1 Microphone Socket ......................................................................................................... 56
3.12.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5) .................................................................................................. 57
3.12.3 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 57
3.12.4 Talk Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 58
3.12.5 Listen Tally LED .............................................................................................................. 58
3.12.6 PD4294 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ...................................................................... 58
3.12.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display ............................................................................................. 58
3.12.8 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 58
3.12.9 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 59
3.12.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................... 59
3.12.11 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 59
3.12.12 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 59
3.12.13 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 59
3.12.14 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 60
3.12.15 Call Reject Pushbutton ................................................................................................. 60
3.12.16 Reply Key ..................................................................................................................... 61
3.12.17 Level Control Pushbutton ............................................................................................. 61
3.12.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 61
3.12.19 Rotary Level Control ..................................................................................................... 61
3.12.20 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 61
3.12.21 Contrast Control ............................................................................................................ 61
4 Extension Panels .................................................................................................62
4.1 PD4203R-Level Control Panel (1RU) ......................................................................... 62
4.1.1 Level Adjustment Control .................................................................................................. 62
4.1.2 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 62
4.2 PD4203 - Level Control Panel (1RU) ......................................................................... 63
4.2.1 Level Adjustment Control .................................................................................................. 63
4.2.2 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 63
4.3 PD4206R - 16 Key Extension Panel (1RU) ................................................................ 64
4.3.1 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 64
4.3.2 PD4206R Direct Access Key Indicator LED ..................................................................... 65
4.3.3 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 65
4.4 PD4206 - 20 Key Extension Panel (1RU) ................................................................... 66
4.4.1 Direct Access Key (DAK) .................................................................................................. 66
4.4.2 Talk Tally LED .................................................................................................................. 67
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page iv
4.4.3 Listen Tally LED ................................................................................................................ 67
4.4.4 PD4206 Direct Access Key Indicator LED ........................................................................ 67
4.4.5 Designation Strip .............................................................................................................. 67
4.5 PD4211 LCD Key Panel (1RU) .................................................................................. 68
4.5.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 68
4.5.2 Crosspoint Level Control .................................................................................................. 68
4.5.3 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 69
4.5.4 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 69
4.5.5 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 69
4.5.6 Headset Select Pushbutton .............................................................................................. 69
4.5.7 Soft Pushbutton ................................................................................................................ 70
4.5.8 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 70
4.5.9 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 70
4.5.10 Loudspeaker Cut ............................................................................................................ 71
4.5.11 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 71
4.5.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 71
4.5.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 72
4.5.12.2 Key Action .............................................................................................................. 73
4.5.13 Supervisor Mode Indication ............................................................................................ 74
4.5.14 Headset Socket .............................................................................................................. 74
4.6 PD4212R LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder ......................................................... 75
4.6.1 PD4212R (revised) front View .......................................................................................... 75
4.6.2 PD4212R Front View ........................................................................................................ 75
4.6.3 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 76
4.6.4 Crosspoint Level Control .................................................................................................. 76
4.6.5 Pot Switch Operation ........................................................................................................ 76
4.6.6 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 77
4.6.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 77
4.6.8 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 78
4.6.9 Headset Select Pushbutton .............................................................................................. 78
4.6.10 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 78
4.6.11 Auxiliary Volume Control ................................................................................................ 78
4.6.12 Main Volume Control ...................................................................................................... 79
4.6.13 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 79
4.6.14 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 79
4.6.14.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 81
4.6.14.2 Key Action and Call Signalling ................................................................................ 81
4.6.15 Headset Socket .............................................................................................................. 82
4.7 PD4212 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder ............................................................ 83
4.7.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 83
4.7.2 Crosspoint Level Control .................................................................................................. 83
4.7.3 Pot Switch Operation ........................................................................................................ 84
4.7.4 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 85
4.7.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 85
4.7.6 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 85
4.7.7 Headset Select Pushbutton .............................................................................................. 85
4.7.8 Soft Pushbutton ................................................................................................................ 85
4.7.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 85
4.7.10 Main Volume Control ...................................................................................................... 86
4.7.11 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 87
4.7.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 87
4.7.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 89
4.7.13 Key Action ....................................................................................................................... 89
4.7.14 Headset Socket .............................................................................................................. 90
4.8 PD4221 LCD Key Panel (2RU) .................................................................................. 91
4.8.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 91
Panel User Guide
Page v
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.8.2 Crosspoint Level Control .................................................................................................. 91
4.8.3 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................... 92
4.8.4 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ........................................................................................... 92
4.8.5 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................... 92
4.8.6 Headset Select Pushbutton .............................................................................................. 92
4.8.7 Soft Pushbutton ................................................................................................................ 93
4.8.8 Auxiliary Volume Control .................................................................................................. 93
4.8.9 Main Volume Control ........................................................................................................ 93
4.8.10 Reply Key ....................................................................................................................... 94
4.8.11 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 94
4.8.11.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 95
4.8.11.2 Key Action .............................................................................................................. 96
4.9 PD4222R LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU) ............................................... 98
4.9.1 Microphone Socket ........................................................................................................... 98
4.9.2 Crosspoint Level Control .................................................................................................. 98
4.9.3 Pot Switch Operation ........................................................................................................ 99
4.9.4 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 100
4.9.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ......................................................................................... 100
4.9.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 100
4.9.7 Headset Select Pushbutton ............................................................................................ 100
4.9.8 Soft Pushbutton .............................................................................................................. 100
4.9.9 Auxiliary Volume Control ................................................................................................ 100
4.9.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................... 101
4.9.11 Reply Key ..................................................................................................................... 102
4.9.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) .............................................................................................. 102
4.9.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ......................................................... 103
4.9.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling .............................................................................. 104
4.9.13 Headset Socket ............................................................................................................ 105
4.10 PD4222 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU) ............................................. 106
4.10.1 Microphone Socket ....................................................................................................... 106
4.10.2 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 106
4.10.3 Pot Switch Operation .................................................................................................... 107
4.10.4 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 108
4.10.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 108
4.10.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 108
4.10.7 Headset Select Pushbutton .......................................................................................... 108
4.10.8 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 108
4.10.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 108
4.10.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................. 109
4.10.11 Reply Key ................................................................................................................... 110
4.10.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ............................................................................................ 110
4.10.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ....................................................... 111
4.10.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling ............................................................................ 112
4.10.13 Headset Socket .......................................................................................................... 113
4.11 PD4222SR Supervisor Key Pane (2RU)l ............................................................... 114
4.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 114
4.11.2 Standard Intercom Mode .............................................................................................. 115
4.11.3 Supervisor Mode Selection ........................................................................................... 115
4.11.3.1 Inhibiting Supervisor Mode ................................................................................... 115
4.11.3.2 Fast Selection of Target Panel ............................................................................. 115
4.11.3.3 SOFT Mode Selection of Target Panel ................................................................. 116
4.11.3.4 Initiation of a Supervisor Panel ¨Æ Target Panel Session .................................... 116
4.11.3.5 Supervisor Mode Indication .................................................................................. 116
4.11.3.6 Exit Supervisor Mode ............................................................................................ 116
4.11.4 Supervisor Facilities ...................................................................................................... 117
4.11.4.1 Key Presses .......................................................................................................... 117
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page vi
4.11.4.2 Cross-point Level Control ..................................................................................... 117
4.11.5 Audio Monitoring In Supervisor Mode ........................................................................... 117
4.11.5.1 Supervisor Panel .................................................................................................. 117
4.11.5.2 Target Panel ......................................................................................................... 117
4.11.5.3 Indication To Third Parties .................................................................................... 117
4.11.5.4 System and Panel Resets .................................................................................... 118
4.11.6 Configuration Downloads .............................................................................................. 118
4.11.7 Input / Output Level Control .......................................................................................... 118
4.12 PD4222S Supervisor Key Panel (2RU) .................................................................. 119
4.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 119
4.12.2 Standard Intercom Mode .............................................................................................. 120
4.12.3 Supervisor Mode Selection ........................................................................................... 120
4.12.3.1 Inhibiting Supervisor Mode ................................................................................... 120
4.12.3.2 Fast Selection of Target Panel ............................................................................. 120
4.12.3.3 SOFT Mode Selection of Target Panel ................................................................. 121
4.12.3.4 Initiation of a Supervisor Panel ¨Æ Target Panel Session .................................... 121
4.12.3.5 Supervisor Mode Indication .................................................................................. 121
4.12.3.6 Exit Supervisor Mode ............................................................................................ 121
4.12.4 Supervisor Facilities ...................................................................................................... 122
4.12.4.1 Key Presses .......................................................................................................... 122
4.12.4.2 Cross-point Level Control ..................................................................................... 122
4.12.5 Audio Monitoring In Supervisor Mode ........................................................................... 122
4.12.5.1 Supervisor Panel .................................................................................................. 122
4.12.5.2 Target Panel ......................................................................................................... 122
4.12.5.3 Indication To Third Parties .................................................................................... 122
4.12.5.4 System and Panel Resets .................................................................................... 122
4.12.6 Configuration Downloads .............................................................................................. 123
4.12.7 Input / Output Level Control .......................................................................................... 123
4.13 PD4232RBL LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (3RU) ...................................... 124
4.13.1 Microphone Socket ....................................................................................................... 124
4.13.2 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 125
4.13.3 Pot Switch Operation .................................................................................................... 125
4.13.4 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 126
4.13.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 126
4.13.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 127
4.13.7 Headset Select Pushbutton .......................................................................................... 127
4.13.8 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 127
4.13.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 127
4.13.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................. 128
4.13.11 Reply Key ................................................................................................................... 128
4.13.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ............................................................................................ 128
4.13.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ....................................................... 130
4.13.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling ............................................................................ 130
4.13.13 Headset Socket .......................................................................................................... 131
4.14 PD4295MCI LCD Desktop Panel ........................................................................... 132
4.14.1 Microphone Socket ....................................................................................................... 132
4.14.2 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 133
4.14.3 Pot Switch Operation .................................................................................................... 133
4.14.4 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 134
4.14.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 134
4.14.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 135
4.14.7 Headset Select Pushbutton .......................................................................................... 135
4.14.8 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 135
4.14.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 135
4.14.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................. 136
4.14.11 Reply Key ................................................................................................................... 136
Panel User Guide
Page vii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.14.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ............................................................................................ 136
4.14.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ....................................................... 138
4.14.13 Key Action ................................................................................................................... 138
4.14.14 Headset Socket .......................................................................................................... 139
4.15 PD4296MCI LCD Desktop Panel ........................................................................... 140
4.15.1 Microphone Socket ....................................................................................................... 140
4.15.2 Crosspoint Level Control .............................................................................................. 141
4.15.3 Pot Switch Operation .................................................................................................... 141
4.15.4 Shift Pushbutton ........................................................................................................... 142
4.15.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 142
4.15.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................. 143
4.15.7 Headset Select Pushbutton .......................................................................................... 143
4.15.8 Soft Pushbutton ............................................................................................................ 143
4.15.9 Auxiliary Volume Control .............................................................................................. 143
4.15.10 Main Volume Control .................................................................................................. 144
4.15.11 Reply Key ................................................................................................................... 144
4.15.12 Direct Access Key (DAK) ............................................................................................ 144
4.15.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ....................................................... 146
4.15.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling ............................................................................ 146
4.15.13 Headset Socket .......................................................................................................... 147
5 LCD Extension Panels .......................................................................................148
5.1 lPD4230R Half Width LCD Extension Panel (1RU) .................................................. 148
5.1.1 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 149
5.1.2 Pot Switch Operation ...................................................................................................... 150
5.1.3 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 151
5.1.4 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 151
5.1.4.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 152
5.1.4.2 Key Action and Call Signalling ................................................................................ 153
5.2 lPD4231R Half Width LCD Control Panel (1RU) ...................................................... 155
5.2.1 Optional Microphone ....................................................................................................... 155
5.2.2 Crosspoint Level Control ................................................................................................ 156
5.2.3 Pot Switch Operation ...................................................................................................... 156
5.2.4 Shift Pushbutton ............................................................................................................. 157
5.2.5 Microphone Mute ............................................................................................................ 157
5.2.6 Loudspeaker ................................................................................................................... 158
5.2.7 Main Volume Control ...................................................................................................... 158
5.2.8 Direct Access Key (DAK) ................................................................................................ 158
5.2.8.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator ........................................................... 160
5.2.9 Key Action ....................................................................................................................... 160
5.2.10 Headset Socket ............................................................................................................ 161
6 Intelligent Control Panel Features ....................................................................162
6.1 DIAL Mode ................................................................................................................ 162
6.1.1 Intelligent Control Panel .................................................................................................. 162
6.1.2 LCD Key Panel ............................................................................................................... 164
6.2 Soft Mode ................................................................................................................. 166
6.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 166
6.2.2 Summary of Programming Functions ............................................................................. 166
6.2.3 ................................................................................................. Soft Mode Programming 166
6.2.4 Soft Mode Options .......................................................................................................... 167
6.2.5 Control Panel Programming Procedures ........................................................................ 167
6.2.5.1 The Assign Option .................................................................................................. 167
6.2.5.2 Using the Load/Add Function ................................................................................. 169
6.2.5.3 Using the List Function ........................................................................................... 170
6.2.5.4 Using the Delete Function ...................................................................................... 170
6.2.5.5 Changing the Talk/Listen Status ............................................................................. 170
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page viii
6.2.5.6 The Directory Facility .............................................................................................. 171
6.2.5.7 The Call Facility ...................................................................................................... 172
6.2.5.8 Programming Examples ......................................................................................... 174
6.3 LCD Key Panel Soft Mode ........................................................................................ 175
6.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 175
6.3.2 Summary of Programming Functions ............................................................................. 175
6.3.3 Soft Mode Programming ................................................................................................. 175
6.4 PD4217 - Intelligent Control Panel ........................................................................... 179
6.4.1 Rotary Encoder ............................................................................................................... 179
6.4.2 Level Control ................................................................................................................... 180
6.4.2.1 Master Level Control Mode ..................................................................................... 180
6.4.2.2 Auxiliary Level Control Mode .................................................................................. 180
6.4.2.3 Crosspoint Listen Level Mode ................................................................................ 180
6.4.3 SOFT Mode .................................................................................................................... 181
6.4.3.1 Directory Scrolling ................................................................................................... 181
6.4.3.2 ASSN (Assign) Mode .............................................................................................. 182
6.4.3.3 DEL (Delete) Mode ................................................................................................. 183
6.4.3.4 ATTR (Talk/Listen) Mode ........................................................................................ 184
6.4.3.5 PAGE Mode ............................................................................................................ 184
6.4.3.6 CALL Mode ............................................................................................................. 184
6.4.3.7 DIAL Mode .............................................................................................................. 185
6.4.4 Shift Page ....................................................................................................................... 186
6.4.5 Diagnostic Page .............................................................................................................. 186
6.4.6 LED Display Brightness Control ..................................................................................... 186
6.4.7 Panel Feature Summary ................................................................................................. 186
6.5 PD4225R/PD4225 - Router Control Panel ............................................................... 188
6.5.1 Remote Assignment Operation ....................................................................................... 188
6.5.2 Remote Audio Control (RAUD) ....................................................................................... 188
6.5.2.1 Operation ................................................................................................................ 189
6.5.3 Remote Key Assignment (RKEY) ................................................................................... 191
6.5.3.1 Operation ................................................................................................................ 191
6.5.4 Input / Output Level Control ............................................................................................ 194
6.6 IFB Router Operation ............................................................................................... 194
6.6.1 IFB Control Panel Configuration ..................................................................................... 194
6.6.2 IFB Destinations ............................................................................................................. 195
6.6.3 Program Sources ............................................................................................................ 195
6.6.4 Programming Examples ................................................................................................. 196
Panel User Guide
Page ix
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page x
List of Figures
Figure 1 - PD4215R (revised) Front View ...............................................................................................3
Figure 2 - PD4215R Front View ..............................................................................................................3
Figure 3 - PD4215 Front View ................................................................................................................8
Figure 4 - PD4217 Front View ..............................................................................................................12
Figure 5 - PD4224R (revised) Front View .............................................................................................17
Figure 6 - PD4224R Front View ............................................................................................................18
Figure 7 - PD4224R INFO Display .......................................................................................................22
Figure 8 - PD4224 Front View ..............................................................................................................24
Figure 9 - PD4224 INFO Display ..........................................................................................................28
Figure 10 - PD4225R Front View ..........................................................................................................30
Figure 11 - PD4225R INFO Display .....................................................................................................34
Figure 12 - PD4225 Front View ............................................................................................................36
Figure 13 - PD4225 INFO Display ........................................................................................................40
Figure 14 - PD4226R Front View ..........................................................................................................42
Figure 15 - PD4226 Front View ............................................................................................................46
Figure 16 - PD4294R Front View ..........................................................................................................50
Figure 17 - PD4294R SHIFT Display ....................................................................................................54
Figure 18 - PD4294 Front View ............................................................................................................56
Figure 19 - PD4294 SHIFT Display ......................................................................................................60
Figure 20 - PD4203R Front View ..........................................................................................................62
Figure 21 - PD4203 Front View ............................................................................................................63
Figure 22 - PD4206R Front View ..........................................................................................................64
Figure 23 - PD4206 Front View ............................................................................................................66
Figure 24 - PD4211 Front View ............................................................................................................68
Figure 25 - PD4212R (revised) Front View ...........................................................................................75
Figure 26 - PD4212R Front View ..........................................................................................................75
Figure 27 - PD4212 Front View ............................................................................................................83
Figure 28 - PD4221 Front View ............................................................................................................91
Figure 29 - PD4222R Front View ..........................................................................................................98
Figure 30 - PD4222 Front View ..........................................................................................................106
Figure 31 - PD4222SR Front View .....................................................................................................114
Figure 32 - PD4222S Front View ........................................................................................................119
Figure 33 - PD4232RBL Front View ...................................................................................................124
Figure 34 - PD4295MCI Front View ....................................................................................................132
Figure 35 - PD4296MCI Front View ....................................................................................................140
Figure 36 - PD4230R Front View ........................................................................................................148
Figure 37 - PD4230RV Front View .....................................................................................................149
Figure 38 - PD4231R Front View ........................................................................................................155
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page i
Panel User Guide
Page ii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
List of Tables
Table 1: PD4215R DAK Operation ........................................................................................................ 4
Table 2: PD4215R Pushbutton Attributes .............................................................................................. 5
Table 3: PD4215 DAK Operation........................................................................................................... 9
Table 4: PD4215 Pushbutton Attributes................................................................................................. 9
Table 5: PD4217 DAK Operation......................................................................................................... 13
Table 6: PD4217 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................... 13
Table 7: PD4224R DAK Operation ...................................................................................................... 19
Table 8: PD4224R Pushbutton Attributes ............................................................................................ 19
Table 9: PD4224 DAK Operation......................................................................................................... 25
Table 10: PD4224 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 26
Table 11: PD4225R DAK Operation .................................................................................................... 31
Table 12: PD4225R Pushbutton Attributes .......................................................................................... 31
Table 13: PD4225 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 37
Table 14: PD4225 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 38
Table 15: PD4226R DAK Operation .................................................................................................... 43
Table 16: PD4226R Pushbutton Attributes .......................................................................................... 43
Table 17: PD4226 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 47
Table 18: PD4226 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 47
Table 19: PD4294R DAK Operation .................................................................................................... 51
Table 20: PD4294R Pushbutton Attributes .......................................................................................... 51
Table 21: PD4294 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 57
Table 22: PD4294 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 58
Table 23: PD4206R DAK Operation .................................................................................................... 64
Table 24: PD4206R Pushbutton Attributes .......................................................................................... 65
Table 25: PD4206 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 66
Table 26: PD4206 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 67
Table 27: PD4211 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 71
Table 28: PD4211 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 72
Table 29: PD4212R DAK Operation .................................................................................................... 80
Table 30: PD4212R Pushbutton Attributes .......................................................................................... 80
Table 31: PD4212 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 88
Table 32: PD4212 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 88
Table 33: PD4221 DAK Operation....................................................................................................... 94
Table 34: PD4221 Pushbutton Attributes............................................................................................. 95
Table 35: PD4222R DAK Operation .................................................................................................. 102
Table 36: PD4222R Pushbutton Attributes ........................................................................................ 103
Table 37: PD4222 DAK Operation..................................................................................................... 110
Table 38: PD4222 Pushbutton Attributes........................................................................................... 111
Table 39: PD4232R DAK Operation .................................................................................................. 129
Table 40: PD4232R Pushbutton Attributes ........................................................................................ 129
Table 41: PD4295MCI DAK Operation .............................................................................................. 137
Table 42: PD4295MCI Pushbutton Attributes .................................................................................... 137
Table 43: PD4296MCI DAK Operation .............................................................................................. 145
Table 44: PD4296MCI Pushbutton Attributes .................................................................................... 145
Table 45: PD4230R DAK Operation .................................................................................................. 151
Table 46: PD4230R Pushbutton Attributes ........................................................................................ 152
Table 47: PD4231R DAK Operation .................................................................................................. 159
Table 48: PD4231R Pushbutton Attributes ........................................................................................ 159
Table 49: Soft Mode Programming Example Directory...................................................................... 166
Table 50: Assign Option Functions .................................................................................................... 168
Table 51: Load or Add Functions....................................................................................................... 169
Table 52: Dial Display ........................................................................................................................ 169
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page i
Panel User Guide
Page ii
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
1 Introduction
The 4000 Series II is a Digital Communications System using a central switching matrix for routing calls
between outstations connected in a star format.
The digital central switching matrix uses a microprocessor for control and configuration purposes. A
Digital Matrix Card, allowing multiple routes to be made simultaneously achieves all switching and
routing. Analogue audio, GPI inputs and outputs, data interfaces and an advanced software package are
also provided as part the 4000 system.
A range of Digital Control Panels are available providing a suitable user interface for making and
receiving calls over the system. These panels contain push buttons configured to operate specific routes
or activate control functions. The push button actions are sent as digital data using a serial link to the
central matrix for interpretation by the microprocessor and information is returned to the control panel by
the same method. Panel audio is sent and received digitally, multiplexed with the data via a single coaxial cable. Panel data and 4-wire audio can also be connected via standard twisted pair wiring or CAT5.
The standard control panels provide the basic facilities of Direct Access Keys (DAKs) which allow singlebutton operation for frequent calls, a Reply (Answer Back) key for responding to unscheduled calls and
where applicable, a dial display for making infrequent calls.
A call is initiated on a control panel by pressing one of the assigned DAKs or, on panels equipped with
an electronic dial-pad, by dialling a number and pressing the call button. This activates crosspoints,
located in the Matrix, which make the audio route (or routes) to the desired destination(s). Routing can
be one-way (e.g. talk only) or two-way (talk and listen simultaneously) and several callers can speak to
the same destination at the same time due to the mixing capability of the matrix.
The crosspoints in the matrix are activated or de-activated according to configuration rules held in the
system's Matrix map (stored in the microprocessor's memory). The system map for the 4000 Series II
residing on a Personal Computer is downloaded into the Matrix from the 'Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System integrated' (CMAPSi) and controls every aspect of 4000 Series II
operation. The Matrix sends part of the system map out to each control panel, programming the actions
available on each DAK of each panel. This includes any special function that may also be assigned to a
particular pushbutton in addition to initiating the normal dual routing.
Each DAK may be centrally configured and assigned to a destination, source or both at system set-up.
On some panels, DAKs that are not assigned at system set-up can be assigned, by local programming
of the pushbuttons in Soft mode, to allow different routing options. Local assignments may not be
retained if the system is reset, although they are held in non-volatile memory at the panel and thus will
be retained after power down.
Destinations and sources can be other panels, beltpacks, 2-wire or 4-wire circuits, either individually or
in groups. The destinations and sources could also be in another talkback system. Connection to other
4000 Series II systems can also be achieved by use of Ethernet Trunk, E1 Data or ISDN, providing an
integrated private intercom network. Up to fifteen 4000 Series II systems can be connected using this
facility.
A Conference facility is also available, configured via CMAPSi, which allows people to converse in a
conference mode. This is similar in operation to the Conference Ring (Party Line) facilities available in
older conventional systems. Users can be allowed access to any conference (up to 64 conferences are
allowed) either to listen only or to talk and listen.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details on Matrices and networking.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 1
CMAPSi operation details are given in the CMAPSi on-line Help facility.
2 Control Panel Overview
The 4000 Series of Control Panels comprise of a range of 1RU and 2RU by 19-inch rack mount units
including Desktop panels.
The Control Panels allow the user to communicate with other parties within the system. It is also possible
to make calls via the standard telephone or ISDN networks. Some of the panels allow the user to
program the function of the buttons while others are basic for the simplest of operations.
There are also Extension Panels that are used to increase the number of buttons per panel or to add
level control facilities.
A Custom Panel Interface is also available to remotely connect keys and displays from the main Control
Panel so that custom panels can be made to fit various size and shape constraints.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details on Control Panels.
3 Control Panel Descriptions
Descriptions of the control panels available are given in following section, including obsolete panel types
sold under the ‘Drake’ brand. The current panels are now sold under the ‘Clearcom’ brand and where
they correspond in functionality to the previous ‘Drake’ panels they have the same number followed by
‘R’. For example, the replacement for the 4215 panel is the 4215R panel.
Panel User Guide
Page 2
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.1 PD4215R (revised) - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU)
Figure 1 - PD4215R (revised) Front View
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton and LED
Designation Strip
Loudspeaker Aperture
Auxiliary Volume Control and LED
Volume Control and LED
7
8
9
10
11
Direct Access Key (DAK)
DAK Indicator LED
Headset Select Pushbutton and LED
Headset Socket
Reply Key
3.2 PD4215R - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU)
Figure 2 - PD4215R Front View
1
2
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton and LED
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
7
8
Direct Access Key (DAK)
DAK Indicator LED
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 3
3
4
5
6
Designation Strip
Loudspeaker Aperture
Auxiliary Volume Control and LED
Volume Control and LED
9
10
11
Headset Select Pushbutton and LED
Headset Socket
Reply Key
3.2.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
3.2.2 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 1: PD4215R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press
will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch
action (default setting).
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched
Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to
make a Talk Route at the same time, and released to
unmake the Talk Route (the latched listen route remains
open). A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Panel User Guide
Page 4
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 1: PD4215R DAK Operation
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock
groups A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK
may be active at any one time. If a DAK in a given group
is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and
the key pressed becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 2: PD4215R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Auto Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Often used between panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Auto Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only
push the key to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.2.3 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.2.4 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.2.5 PD4215R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The tri-coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 5
3.2.6 Designation Strip
This strip indicates the assignments that have been programmed for the DAKs.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi print facility.
3.2.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.2.8 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
3.2.9 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a
powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
3.2.10 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the gooseneck
microphone and panel loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.2.11 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
Panel User Guide
Page 6
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.2.12 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed (or last caller). All other incoming calls
are placed in a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue.
The maximum number of calls in this queue is ten.
3.2.13 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and orange a high setting.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 7
3.3 PD4215 - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Designation Strip
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main Volume Control
Loudspeaker
Headset Socket
Headset Select Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Reply Key
Figure 3 - PD4215 Front View
3.3.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
Headsets for this panel are only available with a DIN 5 connection.
3.3.2 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
Panel User Guide
Page 8
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 3: PD4215 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press
will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch
action (default setting).
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched
Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to
make a Talk Route at the same time, and released to
unmake the Talk Route (the latched listen route remains
open). A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock
groups A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK
may be active at any one time. If a DAK in a given group
is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and
the key pressed becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 4: PD4215 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Auto Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Often used between panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only push
the key to talk.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 9
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources, conferences or IFBs.
3.3.3 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.3.4 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.3.5 PD4215 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.3.6 Designation Strip
This strip indicates the assignments that have been programmed for the DAKs.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi print facility.
3.3.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.3.8 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
3.3.9 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a
powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
Panel User Guide
Page 10
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.3.10 Headset Socket (DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the gooseneck
microphone and panel loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.3.11 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
3.3.12 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed (or last caller). All other incoming calls
are placed in a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue.
The maximum number of calls in this queue is ten.
3.3.13 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and orange a high setting.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 11
3.4 PD4217 - Intelligent Control Panel (1RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Microphone Socket
Soft Mode Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Rotary LED Display
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Alphanumeric LED Display
Loudspeaker
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Headset Socket
Headset Select Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Level Control Pushbutton
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Rotary Encoder
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Reply Key
Figure 4 - PD4217 Front View
3.4.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
Headsets for this panel are only available with a DIN 5 connection.
3.4.2 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
Panel User Guide
Page 12
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 5: PD4217 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch
action (default setting).
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make
a Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route (the latched listen route remains open). A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched
Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be
active at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed
whilst another DAK in the same group is already active the
currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 6: PD4217 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from
the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used
for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from
the destination. Used when listening to an external audio
signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Often used between panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route
is permanently made. The operator need only push the key
to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources, conferences and IFBs.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 13
3.4.3 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Programming” on page 166 for
PD4217 Soft Mode programming description.
3.4.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
3.4.5 Rotary LED Display
The Rotary LED Display consists of four alphanumeric characters that display the level settings or Soft
Mode options selected by the Rotary Encoder.
3.4.6 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.4.7 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.4.8 PD4217 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.4.9 Alphanumeric LED Display
The display comprises a single line of four alphanumeric LED characters per DAK or eight alphanumeric
LED characters per pair of DAKs. The brightness of the LED displays can be adjusted for various lighting
conditions. The Configuration and Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation
software centrally assigns the alphanumeric characters, called mnemonics or alphas.
3.4.10 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged..
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a
powered external loudspeaker.
Panel User Guide
Page 14
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
3.4.11 Headset Socket (DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the main gooseneck
microphone and panel loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.4.12 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
3.4.13 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.4.14 Level Control Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the crosspoint level of a source to be adjusted. The red LED is
illuminated. Press the button corresponding to the source to be adjusted and use the rotary encoder to
adjust the level as required. Pressing the level control pushbutton again will return the Control Panel to
normal operation.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.4.15 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.4.16 Rotary Encoder
The Rotary Encoder is used for level control and selecting the Soft Mode option. Turn the Rotary
Encoder clockwise to increase the Main, Auxiliary or Crosspoint volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the
volume, when in each selected level control mode. The level can be adjusted over a range of values from
0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5 steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default
value of 5.0 corresponds to approximately 0dB.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 15
When Soft Mode is selected, clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation of the Rotary Encoder scrolls through
the following options:
•
ASSN - Create/Modify DAK assignment
•
DEL - Delete DAK assignment
•
ATTR - Change DAK attributes
•
PAGE - Select new assignment page
•
CALL - Direct dialling to other ports
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Programming” for PD4217 Intelligent Control Panel
Rotary Encoder description.
3.4.17 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed (or last caller). All other incoming calls
are placed in a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue.
The maximum number of calls in this queue is ten.
Panel User Guide
Page 16
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.5 PD4224R - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU)
1
2
3
Microphone Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Indicator LED
11
12
13
4
5
6
7
Shift Pushbutton and Associated LED
Info Pushbuttonand Associated LED
Loudspeaker Aperture
Crosspoint Level Control
14
15
16
17
8
9
Rack Mounting Screws (cover removed)
Auxiliary Volume Control and Associated
LED
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton and Associated LED
18
19
10
Main Volume Control and Associated LED
Reply Key
Call Reject Pushbutton and Associated
LED
Soft Pushbutton and Associated LED
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
Headset Socket
Headset Select Pushbutton and Associated LED
Cover Over Rack Mounting Points
Microphone Mute and Associated LED
Figure 5 - PD4224R (revised) Front View
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 17
Figure 6 - PD4224R Front View
1
2
3
Microphone Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Indicator LED
11
12
13
4
5
6
7
Shift Pushbutton and Associated LED
Info Pushbuttonand Associated LED
Loudspeaker Aperture
Crosspoint Level Control
14
15
16
17
8
9
Rack Mounting Screws (cover removed)
Auxiliary Volume Control and Associated
LED
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton and Associated LED
18
19
10
Main Volume Control and Associated LED
Reply Key
Call Reject Pushbutton and Associated
LED
Soft Pushbutton and Associated LED
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
Headset Socket
Headset Select Pushbutton and Associated LED
Cover Over Rack Mounting Points
Microphone Mute and Associated LED
3.5.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
Panel User Guide
Page 18
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.5.2 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 7: PD4224R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 8: PD4224R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Auto Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Auto Listen except that the Listen route is
permanently made. The operator need only push the key to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 19
3.5.3 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.5.4 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.5.5 PD4224R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The tri-coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.5.6 Alphanumeric Display
The main central display is a Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) that provides a four- alphanumeric
character readout per DAK. The display brightness may be altered to four different levels.
The Configuration and Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software
centrally assigns the alphanumeric characters, called mnemonics or alphas.
3.5.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.5.8 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
The rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
3.5.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting. The
rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
Press the auxiliary volume control to adjust the display brightness.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
Panel User Guide
Page 20
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.5.10 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.5.11 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the gooseneck
microphone and panel oudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity; this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring)
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.5.12 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: This will only operate if Extension Panels 1 and 2 have not been configured.
3.5.13 Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• CURRENT MAP NAME
1.
Map Name.
• PANEL POSITION
2.
Directory Port Number.
3.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
4.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
5.
System to which panel is connected.
6. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 21
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Engineering diagnostic information.
10. Software version currently being run by panel processor.11. Date and time of last download.
Figure 7 - PD4224R INFO Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.5.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Programming” for Soft Mode programming description.
3.5.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
3.5.16 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
3.5.17 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
Panel User Guide
Page 22
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.5.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.5.19 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Rotary Level Control.
2.
Display labels start to flash indicating current crosspoint level setting.
3.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
4.
Press the Rotary Level Control to exit crosspoint mode.
The rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 23
3.6 PD4224 - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Alphanumeric LCD Display
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Control
Loudspeaker
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Shift Pushbutton
Info Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Call Reject Pushbutton
Contrast Control
Headset Select Pushbutton
Reply Key
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Level Control Pushbutton
Crosspoint Level Control
Figure 8 - PD4224 Front View
3.6.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Panel User Guide
Page 24
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
3.6.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5)
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.6.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 9: PD4224 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 25
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 10: PD4224 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the key to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.6.4 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.6.5 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.6.6 PD4224 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.6.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display
The LCD display comprises of two display blocks each supporting a single line of four alphanumeric
characters per DAK or eight alphanumeric characters per pair of DAKs. The brightness of the LED
displays can be adjusted for various lighting conditions. The Configuration and Master Assignment
Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software centrally assign the alphanumeric characters,
called mnemonics or alphas.
3.6.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
Panel User Guide
Page 26
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.6.9 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
3.6.10 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.6.11 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.6.12 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: This will only operate if Extension Panels 1 and 2 have not been configured.
3.6.13 Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• CURRENT MAP NAME
1.
Map Name.
• PANEL POSITION
2.
Directory Port Number.
3.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
4.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 27
5.
System to which panel is connected.
6. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Engineering diagnostic information.
10. Software version currently being run by panel processor.
11. Date and time of last download.
Figure 9 - PD4224 INFO Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.6.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Programming” for Soft Mode programming description.
3.6.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
3.6.16 Contrast Control
This control changes the contrast of the LCD by adjusting the back-light level. Turn clockwise to increase
and anti-clockwise to decrease the contrast.
Panel User Guide
Page 28
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.6.17 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
3.6.18 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.6.19 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.6.20 Level Control Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the crosspoint level of a Listen Route to be adjusted. The red LED is
illuminated. Another press will revert to normal Control Panel operation.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.6.21 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Level Control Button.
2.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
3.
Press the Level Control Button to exit crosspoint mode.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 29
3.7 PD4225R - Router Control Panel (2RU)
Figure 10 - PD4225R Front View
1
2
3
Microphone Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Indicator LED
11
12
13
4
5
6
7
Shift Pushbutton and Associated LED
Info Pushbuttonand Associated LED
Loudspeaker Aperture
Crosspoint Level Control
14
15
16
17
8
9
Rack Mounting Screws (cover removed)
Auxiliary Volume Control and Associated
LED
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton and Associated LED
18
19
10
Main Volume Control and Associated LED
Reply Key
Call Reject Pushbutton and Associated
LED
Soft Pushbutton and Associated LED
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
Headset Socket
Headset Select Pushbutton and Associated LED
Cover Over Rack Mounting Points
Microphone Mute and Associated LED
3.7.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Panel User Guide
Page 30
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
3.7.2 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 11: PD4225R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 12: PD4225R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Auto Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Auto Listen except that the Listen route is
permanently made. The operator need only push the key to talk.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 31
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.7.3 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.7.4 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.7.5 PD4225R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The tri-coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.7.6 Alphanumeric Display
The main central display is a Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) that provides a four- alphanumeric
character readout per DAK. The display brightness may be altered to four different levels.
The Configuration and Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software
centrally assigns the alphanumeric characters, called mnemonics or alphas.
3.7.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.7.8 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
The rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
3.7.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting. The
rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
Press the auxiliary volume control to adjust the display brightness.
Panel User Guide
Page 32
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.7.10 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.7.11 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the gooseneck
microphone and panel oudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity; this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring)
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.7.12 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: This will only operate if Extension Panels 1 and 2 have not been configured.
3.7.13 Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• CURRENT MAP NAME
1.
Map Name.
• PANEL POSITION
2.
Directory Port Number.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 33
3.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
4.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
5.
System to which panel is connected.
6. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Engineering diagnostic information.
10. Software version currently being run by panel processor.11. Date and time of last download.
Figure 11 - PD4225R INFO Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.7.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Porgramming” for Soft Mode programming description.
3.7.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
Panel User Guide
Page 34
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.7.16 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
3.7.17 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.7.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.7.19 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Rotary Level Control.
2.
Display labels start to flash indicating current crosspoint level setting.
3.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
4.
Press the Rotary Level Control to exit crosspoint mode.
The rotary control is a digital encoder which rotates continuously without limit. The range over which it
controls the signal is set in software.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 35
3.8 PD4225 - Router Control Panel (2RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Alphanumeric LCD Display
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Control
Loudspeaker
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Shift Pushbutton
Info Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Call Reject Pushbutton
Contrast Control
Headset Select Pushbutton
Reply Key
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Level Control Pushbutton
Crosspoint Level Control
Figure 12 - PD4225 Front View
3.8.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Panel User Guide
Page 36
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
3.8.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5)
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.8.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control (logic) action.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 13: PD4225 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 37
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 14: PD4225 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the key to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.8.4 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.8.5 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.8.6 PD4224 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.8.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display
The LCD display comprises of two display blocks each supporting a single line of four alphanumeric
characters per DAK or eight alphanumeric characters per pair of DAKs. The brightness of the LED
displays can be adjusted for various lighting conditions. The Configuration and Master Assignment
Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software centrally assign the alphanumeric characters,
called mnemonics or alphas.
3.8.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
Panel User Guide
Page 38
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.8.9 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
3.8.10 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.8.11 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.8.12 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: This will only operate if Extension Panels 1 and 2 have not been configured.
3.8.13 Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• CURRENT MAP NAME
1.
Map Name.
• PANEL POSITION
2.
Directory Port Number.
3.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
4.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 39
5.
System to which panel is connected.
6. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Engineering diagnostic information.
10. Software version currently being run by panel processor.
11. Date and time of last download.
Figure 13 - PD4225 INFO Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.8.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “Soft Mode Programming” for Soft Mode programming description.
3.8.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
3.8.16 Contrast Control
This control changes the contrast of the LCD by adjusting the back-light level. Turn clockwise to increase
and anti-clockwise to decrease the contrast.
Panel User Guide
Page 40
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.8.17 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
3.8.18 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.8.19 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.8.20 Level Control Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the crosspoint level of a Listen Route to be adjusted. The red LED is
illuminated. Another press will revert to normal Control Panel operation.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.8.21 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Level Control Button.
2.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
3.
Press the Level Control Button to exit crosspoint mode.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 41
3.9 PD4226R - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU)
Figure 14 - PD4226R Front View
1
2
3
4
5
Microphone Socket
Indicator LED
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Designation Strips
Loudspeaker Aperture
7
8
9
10
11
6
Auxiliary Volume Control and LED
12
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Main Volume Control and Associated LED
Reply Key
Headset Socket
Headset Select Button and Associated
LED
Microphone Mute and Associated LED
3.9.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
Panel User Guide
Page 42
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.9.2 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.9.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 15: PD4226R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 16: PD4226R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the source
panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from
one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from
a Control Panel) is required.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 43
Table 16: PD4226R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Used between panels
and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
3.9.4 PD4226R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The tri-coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.9.5 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi print facility.
3.9.6 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.9.7 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
3.9.8 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.9.9 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Panel User Guide
Page 44
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.9.10 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
3.9.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.9.12 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 45
3.10 PD4226 - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Designation Strip
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
8
9
10
11
12
13
Main Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Control
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
Reply Key
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Figure 15 - PD4226 Front View
3.10.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
Panel User Guide
Page 46
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.10.2 Headset Socket
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required. (Headsets should be used in areas where a number of
control panels are used in close proximity, this should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.10.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 17: PD4226 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position.
Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages
when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H. Within
an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time. If a DAK
in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same group is
already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 18: PD4226 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the source
panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from
one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from
a Control Panel) is required.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 47
Table 18: PD4226 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only push the key to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.10.4 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.10.5 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.10.6 PD4226 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.10.7 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi print facility.
3.10.8 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.10.9 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting;
green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
3.10.10 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
Panel User Guide
Page 48
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.10.11 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.10.12 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
3.10.13 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.10.14 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 49
3.11 PD4294R - Desktop Control Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Alphanumeric LCD Display
Headset Select Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Control
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Loudspeaker
Shift Pushbutton
Info Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Call Reject Pushbutton
Reply Key
Level Control Pushbutton
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Rotary Level Control
Contrast Control
Figure 16 - PD4294R Front View
3.11.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Panel User Guide
Page 50
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
3.11.2 Headset Socket (XLR 5 or DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.11.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 19: PD4294R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the
button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second
momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H.
Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one
time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the
same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated
and the key pressed becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 20: PD4294R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 51
Table 20: PD4294R Pushbutton Attributes
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.11.4 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.11.5 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.11.6 PD4294R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.11.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display
The LCD display comprises of a display block supporting a single line of four alphanumeric characters
per DAK or eight alphanumeric characters per pair of DAKs. The Configuration and Master Assignment
Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software centrally assign the alphanumeric characters,
called mnemonics or alphas.
3.11.8 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
3.11.9 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.11.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
Panel User Guide
Page 52
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.11.11 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the
volume setting; green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high
setting.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.11.12 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options.
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.11.13 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• PANEL POSITION
1.
Directory Port Number.
2.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
3.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
4.
System to which panel is connected.
5. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
6.
Engineering diagnostic information.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 53
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Software version currently being run by panel processor.
Figure 17 - PD4294R SHIFT Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.11.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section on Soft Mode Programming for a description description.
3.11.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
3.11.16 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
Panel User Guide
Page 54
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.11.17 Level Control Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the crosspoint level of a Listen Route to be adjusted. The red LED is
illuminated. Another press will revert to normal Control Panel operation.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.11.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.11.19 Rotary Level Control
The Rotary Level Control can only be used when the Level Control Select Pushbutton has been
selected. The crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio associated with a depressed DAK can
be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5 steps. The values correspond to a gain range
of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0 corresponds to approximately 0dB.
3.11.20 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Level Control Button.
2.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
3.
Press the Level Control Button to exit crosspoint mode.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.11.21 Contrast Control
This control changes the contrast of the LCD by adjusting the back-light level. Turn clockwise to increase
and counter-clockwise to decrease the contrast.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 55
3.12 PD4294 - Desktop Control Panel
1
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
2
14
3
4
5
6
15
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
Alphanumeric LCD Display
Headset Select Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Control
16
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
7
8
9
17
10
18 19
20
Loudspeaker
Shift Pushbutton
Info Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Call Reject Pushbutton
Reply Key
Level Control Pushbutton
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Rotary Level Control
Contrast Control
Figure 18 - PD4294 Front View
3.12.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone options.
Panel User Guide
Page 56
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of microphones 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
3.12.2 Headset Socket (DIN 5)
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround (audio feedback) occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
3.12.3 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to make
Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can also
be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 21: PD4294 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the
button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second
momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H.
Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one
time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the
same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated
and the key pressed becomes active.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 57
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 22: PD4294 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the
source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Often used between
panels and external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
3.12.4 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment. This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
3.12.5 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
3.12.6 PD4294 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
3.12.7 Alphanumeric LCD Display
The LCD display comprises of a display block supporting a single line of four alphanumeric characters
per DAK or eight alphanumeric characters per pair of DAKs. The Configuration and Master Assignment
Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software centrally assign the alphanumeric characters,
called mnemonics or alphas.
3.12.8 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the main gooseneck microphone and panel
loudspeaker are muted.
Panel User Guide
Page 58
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.12.9 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
3.12.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the volume setting; green
indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high setting.
3.12.11 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The volume level indicator LED changes colour according to the
volume setting; green indicates a low setting, green and orange an intermediate setting and red a high
setting.
The auxiliary channel is not always used.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line level auxiliary
input.
3.12.12 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
A panel fitted with the PDE4537 options card can be connected to a powered external loudspeaker.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options.
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key is pressed.
This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio feedback) occurring.
3.12.13 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.Info Pushbutton
Press and hold the pushbutton to display panel configuration information, identifying the following data:
• PANEL POSITION
1.
Directory Port Number.
2.
Four Character Mnemonic (short name).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 59
3.
Description (long name).
• NETWORK INFORMATION
4.
System to which panel is connected.
5. Systems which exist on the network. A flashing number indicates a system number which the
configuration was expecting to exist but has not been detected on the network.
• SYSTEM INFORMATION
6.
Engineering diagnostic information.
7.
Engineering diagnostic information.
8.
Engineering diagnostic information.
9.
Software version currently being run by panel processor.
Figure 19 - PD4294 SHIFT Display
The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton is pressed.
3.12.14 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section on Soft Mode Programming for a description description.
3.12.15 Call Reject Pushbutton
To reject any incoming calls made to the Control Panel by an assigned DAK, press this pushbutton and
the DAK pushbutton assigned to the call to be rejected. The red LED is illuminated whilst the pushbutton
is pressed.
Panel User Guide
Page 60
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
3.12.16 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LED indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
3.12.17 Level Control Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the crosspoint level of a Listen Route to be adjusted. The red LED is
illuminated. Another press will revert to normal Control Panel operation.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.12.18 Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to disable the internal loudspeaker. The red LED is illuminated. Another press will
enable the loudspeaker again.
3.12.19 Rotary Level Control
The Rotary Level Control can only be used when the Level Control Select Pushbutton has been
selected. The crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio associated with a depressed DAK can
be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5 steps. The values correspond to a gain range
of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0 corresponds to approximately 0dB.
3.12.20 Crosspoint Level Control
The Rotary Level Control is used to adjust the crosspoint level at the panel for any incoming audio
associated with a depressed DAK and can be adjusted over a range of values from 0.0 to 10.0 in 0.5
steps. The values correspond to a gain range of -70dB to +12dB, where the default value of 5.0
corresponds to approximately 0dB. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise to increase the Crosspoint
volume, anti-clockwise to decrease the volume, when in each selected level control mode.
1.
Press the Level Control Button.
2.
Press and hold the required key and adjust the rotary level between 0 -10.
3.
Press the Level Control Button to exit crosspoint mode.
NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds of pressing the pushbutton then the system will revert to
normal operation.
3.12.21 Contrast Control
This control changes the contrast of the LCD by adjusting the back-light level. Turn clockwise to increase
and counter-clockwise to decrease the contrast.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 61
4 Extension Panels
4.1 PD4203R-Level Control Panel (1RU)
Figure 20 - PD4203R Front View
1
Level Adjustment Control
2
Designation Strip
4.1.1 Level Adjustment Control
The 4203 1RU Level Control Panel has sixteen Level Adjustment Controls. These controls are used to
vary the crosspoint level at the Control Panel for the assignments made to the selected DAKs. Turn the
level control clockwise to increase crosspoint gain, counter-clockwise to decrease gain.
Consult the Section PD4225 - Router Control Panel for Input / Output Level Control
description.
There is a rotary switch inside the panel to set which bank of sixteen keys the level adjustment controls
are assigned to. Please refer to the installation guide for further details.
4.1.2 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi/P Print facility.
Panel User Guide
Page 62
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.2 PD4203 - Level Control Panel (1RU)
1
Level Adjustment Control
2
Designation Strip
Figure 21 - PD4203 Front View
4.2.1 Level Adjustment Control
The 4203 1RU Level Control Panel has twenty Level Adjustment Controls. These controls are used to
vary the crosspoint level at the Control Panel for the assignments made to the selected DAKs. Turn the
level control clockwise to increase crosspoint gain, counter-clockwise to decrease gain.
Consult the Section PD4225 - Router Control Panel for Input / Output Level Control
description.
There is a rotary switch inside the panel to set which bank of twenty keys the level adjustment controls
are assigned to. Please refer to the installation guide for further details.
4.2.2 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi/P Print facility.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 63
4.3 PD4206R - 16 Key Extension Panel (1RU)
Figure 22 - PD4206R Front View
1
2
Indicator LED
Direct Access Key (DAK)
3
Designation Strip
4.3.1 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4206R Extension Panel has sixteen Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
There is a rotary switch inside the panel to select which bank of sixteen keys it controls in the range 33
- 112. For further details please refer to the installation manual.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 23: PD4206R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the
button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H.
Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time.
If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same
group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the
key pressed becomes active.
Panel User Guide
Page 64
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 24: PD4206R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the source
panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication
from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating
from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Used between panels
and also with certain external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferences or IFBs.
4.3.2 PD4206R Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The tri-coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
4.3.3 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi Print facility.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 65
4.4 PD4206 - 20 Key Extension Panel (1RU)
1
2
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Talk Tally LED
3
4
Listen Tally LED
Designation Strip
Figure 23 - PD4206 Front View
4.4.1 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4206 Extension Panel has twenty Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used to
make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK can
also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
There is a rotary switch inside the panel to select which bank of twenty keys it controls in the range 33 112. For further details please refer to the installation manual.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 25: PD4206 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will latch the
button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route.
The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a Talk Route at the
same time, and released to unmake the Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups A - H.
Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active at any one time.
If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst another DAK in the same
group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the
key pressed becomes active.
Panel User Guide
Page 66
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 26: PD4206 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the source
panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication
from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made from the destination. Used when listening to an external audio signal (not originating
from a Control Panel) is required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to be made
between the source panel and the destinations. Used between panels
and also with certain external audio signals.
Talk & Forced Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen route is permanently made. The operator need only press the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels and external sources,
conferencers or IFBs.
4.4.2 Talk Tally LED
This Red LED indicates that the button action is active (either latched or transient), dependent on
individual programming/assignment This LED will flash when the destination is busy if this feature is
enabled.
4.4.3 Listen Tally LED
This Green LED indicates that an audio is being received by the Control Panel from the source
associated with the DAK.
4.4.4 PD4206 Direct Access Key Indicator LED
The coloured LEDs associated with the Direct Access Keys (DAKs) have the following meanings:
•
Red (R) means “Talk” (key pressed).
•
Green (G) means “Listen” (incoming audio from that source).
•
Orange (O) means activity (a mix of Talk and Listen).
4.4.5 Designation Strip
Insert a paper Designation Strip to indicate the area of communication for each of the DAK's.
NOTE: Designation strips can be printed using the CMAPSi Print facility.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 67
4.5 PD4211 LCD Key Panel (1RU)
1
2
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
Microphone Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
3
8
7
4
5
6
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Headset Socket
Figure 24 - PD4211 Front View
NOTE: Microphone is shown here for illustrative purposes only. Contact Vitec Group Communications
for details of suitable products.
4.5.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
4.5.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Press the pot switch above the Reply Key to activate Cross-point Level Control Mode. The red LED
associated with the controller is illuminated while Level Control Mode is active.
Panel User Guide
Page 68
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Selecting a DAK, while turning the controller clockwise or counter-clockwise, causes the cross-point
level to increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator and a numeric indication of
the level setting is displayed while the DAK is pressed.
Only one DAK press is recognised at a time for cross-point level control. Further DAK presses are
ignored until the first DAK is released.
After 20 seconds without any DAK or pot activity the panel automatically exits Level Control Mode and
reverts to normal intercom mode.
4.5.3 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.5.4 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4.5.5 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.5.6 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 69
4.5.7 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.5.8 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.5.9 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Panel User Guide
Page 70
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0dB).
4.5.10 Loudspeaker Cut
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.5.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.5.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 27: PD4211 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 71
Table 27: PD4211 DAK Operation
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 28: PD4211 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4.5.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
Panel User Guide
Page 72
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.5.12.2 Key Action
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has orange text on a black background.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 73
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes green to indicate that the LCD key should
be pressed to respond to the call.
4.5.13 Supervisor Mode Indication
The target panel key background colour changes from 'green-orange' to 'high yellow' to indicate that a
session is active. As the Supervisor Panel mimics the target panel display, its key background colour
also changes to 'high yellow'.
4.5.14 Headset Socket
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Panel User Guide
Page 74
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.6 PD4212R LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder
4.6.1 PD4212R (revised) front View
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Crosspoint Level Control
Loudspeaker
Auxiliary Volume Control
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Soft Pushbutton
Headset Select Pushbutton
Headset Socket
Figure 25 - PD4212R (revised) Front View
4.6.2 PD4212R Front View
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Crosspoint Level Control
Loudspeaker
Auxiliary Volume Control
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Soft Pushbutton
Headset Select Pushbutton
Headset Socket
Figure 26 - PD4212R Front View
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 75
NOTE: Microphone is shown here for illustrative purposes only. Contact Vitec Group Communications
for details of suitable products.
4.6.3 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
4.6.4 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.6.5 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4212 and PD4222 panel types, operates on the same port as the corresponding
LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
Panel User Guide
Page 76
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.6.6 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.6.7 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 77
4.6.8 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.6.9 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.6.10 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.6.11 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Panel User Guide
Page 78
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.6.12 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.6.13 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.6.14 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 79
Table 29: PD4212R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 30: PD4212R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
Panel User Guide
Page 80
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.6.14.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.6.14.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 81
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.6.15 Headset Socket
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Panel User Guide
Page 82
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.7 PD4212 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder
1
2
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
Microphone Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
3
8
4
7
5
6
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Headset Socket
Figure 27 - PD4212 Front View
NOTE: Microphone is shown here for illustrative purposes only. Contact Vitec Group Communications
for details of suitable products.
4.7.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
4.7.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 83
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.7.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4212 and PD4222 panel types, operates on the same port as the corresponding
LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
Panel User Guide
Page 84
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.7.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.7.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4.7.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.7.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.7.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.7.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 85
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.7.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Panel User Guide
Page 86
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.7.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.7.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 87
Table 31: PD4212 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 32: PD4212 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
Panel User Guide
Page 88
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.7.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.7.13 Key Action
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 89
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.7.14 Headset Socket
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Panel User Guide
Page 90
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.8 PD4221 LCD Key Panel (2RU)
1
2
3
4
5
12
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
8
7
6
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Headset Socket
Figure 28 - PD4221 Front View
4.8.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
4.8.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Press the pot switch above the Reply Key to activate Cross-point Level Control Mode. The red LED
associated with the controller is illuminated while Level Control Mode is active.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 91
Selecting a DAK, while turning the controller clockwise or counter-clockwise, causes the cross-point
level to increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator and a numeric indication of
the level setting is displayed while the DAK is pressed.
Only one DAK press is recognised at a time for cross-point level control. Further DAK presses are
ignored until the first DAK is released.
After 20 seconds without any DAK or pot activity the panel automatically exits Level Control Mode and
reverts to normal intercom mode.
4.8.3 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.8.4 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4.8.5 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.8.6 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
Panel User Guide
Page 92
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.8.7 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.8.8 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for
both controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.8.9 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 93
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.8.10 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.8.11 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 33: PD4221 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Panel User Guide
Page 94
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 33: PD4221 DAK Operation
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 34: PD4221 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4.8.11.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 95
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.8.11.2 Key Action
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has orange text on a black background.
Panel User Guide
Page 96
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes green to indicate that the LCD key should
be pressed to respond to the call.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 97
4.9 PD4222R LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Crosspoint Level Control
Loudspeaker
Auxiliary Volume Control
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
8
9
10
11
12
13
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Soft Pushbutton
Headset Select Pushbutton
Headset Socket
Figure 29 - PD4222R Front View
4.9.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
4.9.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Panel User Guide
Page 98
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.9.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4212 and PD4222 panel types, operates on the same port as the corresponding
LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 99
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.9.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.9.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4.9.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.9.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.9.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.9.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
Panel User Guide
Page 100
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.9.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 101
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.9.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.9.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 35: PD4222R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
Panel User Guide
Page 102
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 36: PD4222R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4.9.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 103
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.9.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on an yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
Panel User Guide
Page 104
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.9.13 Headset Socket
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 105
4.10 PD4222 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU)
1
2
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
Microphone Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
9
8
7
4
5
6
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Headset Socket
Figure 30 - PD4222 Front View
4.10.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
4.10.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Panel User Guide
Page 106
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.10.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4212 and PD4222 panel types, operates on the same port as the corresponding
LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 107
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.10.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.10.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
4.10.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.10.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.10.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.10.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
Panel User Guide
Page 108
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.10.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 109
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.10.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.10.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 37: PD4222 DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
Panel User Guide
Page 110
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 38: PD4222 Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4.10.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 111
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.10.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on an yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
Panel User Guide
Page 112
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.10.13 Headset Socket
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 113
4.11 PD4222SR Supervisor Key Pane (2RU)l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Microphone Socket
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Level Control
Loudspeaker
Auxiliary Volume Control
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
8
9
10
11
12
13
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Soft Pushbutton
Headset Select Pushbutton
Headset Socket
Figure 31 - PD4222SR Front View
4.11.1 Introduction
A PD4222SR Key Panel, when in Supervisor Mode, can mimic and control any 'target' panel in the local
system. This involves remote actioning of key presses and rotary encoder changes, and displaying a
mimic of the target panel's display. Whilst in Supervisor Mode all key presses and rotary encoder
changes are processed at the target panel.
PD4222, PD4222R, PD4221, PD4212R, PD4212 and PD4211 LCD key panel types can be selected as
target panels. When a Supervisor Panel selects any other 3000 or 4000 series panels as a target panel
an error message is displayed on the supervisor panel.
Panel User Guide
Page 114
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The following target panel features can be mimicked or controlled:
• Audio to the target panel
• Display text
• Display level control bars
• Key presses and releases
• Key colour
• LED status
• Cross-point level control
• Microphone gain
• Loudspeaker cut
• Head-set select
• Microphone mute
• Side-tone control
• Main volume level control
• Auxiliary volume level control
General purpose inputs and outputs are not mimicked or remotely controllable as they may not be
connected to the same hardware on the supervisor and target panels.
In particular, some of the general-purpose inputs and outputs have dedicated functions on a Supervisor
Panel. Busy Feedback is not mimicked.
Up to 8 Supervisor Panels are supported in a system.
Where multiple Supervisor Panels exist in a system, it is not possible for a Supervisor Panel to mimic/
control another Supervisor Panel.
A Supervisor Panel does not support the Remote Audio (RAUD), Remote Key Assignment (RKEY), or
IFB assignment facilities that are provided by standard router panels.
4.11.2 Standard Intercom Mode
When a Supervisor Panel is not operating in Supervisor Mode, standard panel intercom facilities are
available.
See the section PD4222R LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU) for details.
4.11.3 Supervisor Mode Selection
4.11.3.1 Inhibiting Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode can be inhibited centrally by CMAPS using auxiliary output #7 (i.e. panel control output
#58). The supervisor panel does not have to have a PDE4537 options card fitted for this feature to
operate. If the PDE4537 options card is fitted the relay output 2 will be fired. Relay 2 normally open A
and relay 2 normally open B will be made.
4.11.3.2 Fast Selection of Target Panel
Fast selection of a target panel is possible by configuring a DAK with the reserved directory entry SUPR
(dial-code 991 for 'large' configuration maps; dial-code 735 for 'small' configuration maps).
Pressing the SUPR key causes the text to flash on any DAK configured with a local system port (n.b.
ports are panels and 4-wires). Only DAKs with a port configured as the first entry will flash.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 115
An EXIT key option allows the operator to abort target panel selection without selecting a panel.
Pressing a DAK with flashing text selects that DAK's assignment as the target panel. Target panel
selection on the shifted page also requires a DAK configured with the reserved directory entry SUPR.
4.11.3.3 SOFT Mode Selection of Target Panel
SOFT Mode allows any LCD Key Panel in the local system to be selected as a target panel.
SOFT:
ASSN
Sel
Opt
DIR
PAGE
CALL
SUPR
INFO
EXIT
Pressing the SUPR option allows the operator to select the target panel.
0
1
2
3
4
SUPR:
5
Enter
CLR
6
7
8
9
N o.
DIR
EXIT
The operator can select the target panel by entering a local system dial-code or by selecting the target
panel from the local system directory using the DIR option.
0
1
2
3
4
SUPR:
5
6
7
8
9
604
CLR
DIR
TAKE
EXIT
Pressing the TAKE option selects the displayed dial-code as the target panel.
4.11.3.4 Initiation of a Supervisor Panel ←→ Target Panel Session
When a valid target panel has been selected, the Supervisor Panel display and LED status switch over
to mimic the current display and LED status of the target panel.
4.11.3.5 Supervisor Mode Indication
The target panel key background colour changes from 'green-orange' to 'bright orange' to indicate that
a session is active. As the Supervisor Panel mimics the target panel display, its key background colour
also changes to 'bright orange'.
General Purpose Output (GPO)
For a Supervisor Panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card, auxiliary output #6 (i.e. panel control output
#57) is asserted while a mimic/control session is active. Relay 1 will be fired; relay 1 normally open A
and relay 1 normally open B will be made.
4.11.3.6 Exit Supervisor Mode
Auxiliary Control Pot Switch
Pressing the Auxiliary Volume Control pot switch allows the current session to be terminated.
Panel User Guide
Page 116
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
General Purpose Input (GPI)
For a Supervisor Panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card, a button or switch connected to GPI #3 can
be used to terminate a mimic/control session. Any switch transition detected on GPI #3 causes the
current session to be terminated.
4.11.4 Supervisor Facilities
When a valid target panel has been selected, the Supervisor Panel display and LED Status switch over
to mimic the current display and LED Status of the target panel.
4.11.4.1 Key Presses
All Supervisor Panel key presses, except for the auxiliary volume control pot switch (i.e. INFO key), are
transferred to the target panel, as if pressed at the target panel. The target panel responds to local key
presses and key presses transferred from the Supervisor Panel.
When the same key is pressed or held simultaneously on the Supervisor and target panels, the first key
action to be detected causes the key press action to take effect. The last key to be released causes the
release to take effect.
4.11.4.2 Cross-point Level Control
Cross-point level control affects the level of incoming audio routes to the target and Supervisor panels.
A Supervisor Panel and target panel both have the ability to control the cross-point levels.
The cross-point level is determined by the 'last moved' rotary encoder. For example, if the Supervisor
Panel is used to turn a cross-point level down to 0.0, then the target panel is used to turn the same crosspoint level up to 10.0, a further movement of the Supervisor Panel control 'jumps' the level back down to
0.0 again. The level bar indicator on the Supervisor and target panel keys always shows the actual crosspoint level.
When using a Supervisor Panel to control either a PD4221 or PD4211 target panel type (i.e. LCD key
panels with a single rotary encoder above the REPLY key), the rotary encoders above the supervisor
panel DAKs do not control the cross-point levels of the associated DAK. The supervisor panel mimics
the target panel operation, so the rotary encoder above the REPLY key needs to be pressed to invoke
cross-point level control mode on the target panel. Cross-point level control can then be performed at
the supervisor panel by pressing the desired DAK and turning the REPLY key rotary encoder.
4.11.5 Audio Monitoring In Supervisor Mode
4.11.5.1 Supervisor Panel
All audio routes to and from a Supervisor Panel, prior to the selection of a target panel, are removed
while the mimic/control session is active. The routes are restored when the mimic/control session is
terminated.
New calls to a Supervisor Panel are not routed to or indicated to the Supervisor Panel until after the
mimic/control session has been terminated.
4.11.5.2 Target Panel
New calls to a target panel are duplicated at the Supervisor Panel unless the rack set-up inhibits the
routes (e.g. permanently open cross-point).
4.11.5.3 Indication To Third Parties
A third party panel making calls to the target or Supervisor panel during a mimic/control session will not
receive any indication that the destination they are calling is currently in a mimic/control session.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 117
4.11.5.4 System and Panel Resets
After a red button reset the Supervisor and target panels maintain the mimic/control session.
After a black button reset the Supervisor and target panels mimic/control session is lost.
When a Supervisor Panel is taken off-line from the matrix, the matrix deletes the mimic/control session
and informs the target panel that the session is terminated.
When a Supervisor Panel is brought back on-line it attempts to restore the mimic/control session with
the target panel. If the target panel has become the target for another Supervisor Panel the attempt will
fail.
4.11.6 Configuration Downloads
After a Non-Intrusive or 'Red Reset' configuration download the Supervisor and target panels maintain
the mimic/control session.
4.11.7 Input / Output Level Control
The PD4225 Supervisor Key Panel, with attached PD4203 Level Control Panels, can provide a
combination of input and output level control for the program sources, destinations or other physical
ports. A maximum of 80 separate level controls can be applied to a nominated range of ports. The Level
Control Panels are centred at 0dB and can provide a range of -70dB to +12dB.
It is recommended that the level controls be mapped to a contiguous range of ports, for ease of
operation, and it is also recommended that the program source DAKs are also configured as a
contiguous range. This allows each level control to map physically to the program source Extension
Panel DAK above or below it.
NOTE: The input and output port details that are to be controlled by the PD4225 I/O Level Control
capabilities are factory set on request and can only be modified by Vitec Group Communications.
Panel User Guide
Page 118
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.12 PD4222S Supervisor Key Panel (2RU)
1
2
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
Microphone Socket
Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Loudspeaker
Headset Select Pushbutton
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
9
8
7
4
5
6
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Main Volume Control
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Headset Socket
Figure 32 - PD4222S Front View
4.12.1 Introduction
A PD4222S Key Panel, when in Supervisor Mode, can mimic and control any 'target' panel in the local
system. This involves remote actioning of key presses and rotary encoder changes, and displaying a
mimic of the target panel's display. Whilst in Supervisor Mode all key presses and rotary encoder
changes are processed at the target panel.
PD4222, PD4221, PD4212 and PD4211 LCD key panel types can be selected as target panels. When
a Supervisor Panel selects any other 3000 or 4000 series panels as a target panel an error message is
displayed on the supervisor panel.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 119
The following target panel features can be mimicked or controlled:
• Audio to the target panel
• Display text
• Display level control bars
• Key presses and releases
• Key colour
• LED status
• Cross-point level control
• Microphone gain
• Loudspeaker cut
• Head-set select
• Microphone mute
• Side-tone control
• Main volume level control
• Auxiliary volume level control
General purpose inputs and outputs are not mimicked or remotely controllable as they may not be
connected to the same hardware on the supervisor and target panels.
In particular, some of the general-purpose inputs and outputs have dedicated functions on a Supervisor
Panel. Busy Feedback is not mimicked.
Up to 8 Supervisor Panels are supported in a system.
Where multiple Supervisor Panels exist in a system, it is not possible for a Supervisor Panel to mimic/
control another Supervisor Panel.
A Supervisor Panel does not support the Remote Audio (RAUD), Remote Key Assignment (RKEY), or
IFB assignment facilities that are provided by standard router panels.
4.12.2 Standard Intercom Mode
When a Supervisor Panel is not operating in Supervisor Mode, standard panel intercom facilities are
available.
See the section PD4222 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (2RU) for details.
4.12.3 Supervisor Mode Selection
4.12.3.1 Inhibiting Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode can be inhibited centrally by CMAPS using auxiliary output #7 (i.e. panel control output
#57). The supervisor panel does not have to have a PDE4537 options card fitted for this feature to
operate.
4.12.3.2 Fast Selection of Target Panel
Fast selection of a target panel is possible by configuring a DAK with the reserved directory entry SUPR
(dial-code 991 for 'large' configuration maps; dial-code 735 for 'small' configuration maps).
Pressing the SUPR key causes the text to flash on any DAK configured with a local system port (n.b.
ports are panels and 4-wires). Only DAKs with a port configured as the first entry will flash.
An EXIT key option allows the operator to abort target panel selection without selecting a panel.
Panel User Guide
Page 120
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Pressing a DAK with flashing text selects that DAK's assignment as the target panel. Target panel
selection on the shifted page also requires a DAK configured with the reserved directory entry SUPR.
4.12.3.3 SOFT Mode Selection of Target Panel
SOFT Mode allows any LCD Key Panel in the local system to be selected as a target panel.
SOFT:
ASSN
Sel
Opt
DIR
PAGE
CALL
SUPR
INFO
EXIT
Pressing the SUPR option allows the operator to select the target panel.
0
1
2
3
4
SUPR:
5
Enter
CLR
6
7
8
9
N o.
DIR
EXIT
The operator can select the target panel by entering a local system dial-code or by selecting the target
panel from the local system directory using the DIR option.
0
1
2
3
4
SUPR:
5
6
7
8
9
604
CLR
DIR
TAKE
EXIT
Pressing the TAKE option selects the displayed dial-code as the target panel.
4.12.3.4 Initiation of a Supervisor Panel ←→ Target Panel Session
When a valid target panel has been selected, the Supervisor Panel display and LED status switch over
to mimic the current display and LED status of the target panel.
4.12.3.5 Supervisor Mode Indication
The target panel key background colour changes from 'green-orange' to 'bright orange' to indicate that
a session is active. As the Supervisor Panel mimics the target panel display, its key background colour
also changes to 'bright orange'.
General Purpose Output (GPO)
For a Supervisor Panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card, auxiliary output #6 (i.e. panel control output
#57) is asserted while a mimic/control session is active.
4.12.3.6 Exit Supervisor Mode
Auxiliary Control Pot Switch
Pressing the Auxiliary Volume Control pot switch allows the current session to be terminated.
General Purpose Input (GPI)
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 121
For a Supervisor Panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card, a button or switch connected to GPI #3 can
be used to terminate a mimic/control session. Any switch transition detected on GPI #3 causes the
current session to be terminated.
4.12.4 Supervisor Facilities
When a valid target panel has been selected, the Supervisor Panel display and LED Status switch over
to mimic the current display and LED Status of the target panel.
4.12.4.1 Key Presses
All Supervisor Panel key presses, except for the auxiliary volume control pot switch (i.e. INFO key), are
transferred to the target panel, as if pressed at the target panel. The target panel responds to local key
presses and key presses transferred from the Supervisor Panel.
When the same key is pressed or held simultaneously on the Supervisor and target panels, the first key
action to be detected causes the key press action to take effect. The last key to be released causes the
release to take effect.
4.12.4.2 Cross-point Level Control
Cross-point level control affects the level of incoming audio routes to the target and Supervisor panels.
A Supervisor Panel and target panel both have the ability to control the cross-point levels.
The cross-point level is determined by the 'last moved' rotary encoder. For example, if the Supervisor
Panel is used to turn a cross-point level down to 0.0, then the target panel is used to turn the same crosspoint level up to 10.0, a further movement of the Supervisor Panel control 'jumps' the level back down to
0.0 again. The level bar indicator on the Supervisor and target panel keys always shows the actual crosspoint level.
When using a Supervisor Panel to control either a PD4221 or PD4211 target panel type (i.e. LCD key
panels with a single rotary encoder above the REPLY key), the rotary encoders above the supervisor
panel DAKs do not control the cross-point levels of the associated DAK. The supervisor panel mimics
the target panel operation, so the rotary encoder above the REPLY key needs to be pressed to invoke
cross-point level control mode on the target panel. Cross-point level control can then be performed at
the supervisor panel by pressing the desired DAK and turning the REPLY key rotary encoder.
4.12.5 Audio Monitoring In Supervisor Mode
4.12.5.1 Supervisor Panel
All audio routes to and from a Supervisor Panel, prior to the selection of a target panel, are removed
while the mimic/control session is active. The routes are restored when the mimic/control session is
terminated.
New calls to a Supervisor Panel are not routed to or indicated to the Supervisor Panel until after the
mimic/control session has been terminated.
4.12.5.2 Target Panel
New calls to a target panel are duplicated at the Supervisor Panel unless the rack set-up inhibits the
routes (e.g. permanently open cross-point).
4.12.5.3 Indication To Third Parties
A third party panel making calls to the target or Supervisor panel during a mimic/control session will not
receive any indication that the destination they are calling is currently in a mimic/control session.
4.12.5.4 System and Panel Resets
After a red button reset the Supervisor and target panels maintain the mimic/control session.
Panel User Guide
Page 122
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
After a black button reset the Supervisor and target panels mimic/control session is lost.
When a Supervisor Panel is taken off-line from the matrix, the matrix deletes the mimic/control session
and informs the target panel that the session is terminated.
When a Supervisor Panel is brought back on-line it attempts to restore the mimic/control session with
the target panel. If the target panel has become the target for another Supervisor Panel the attempt will
fail.
4.12.6 Configuration Downloads
After a Non-Intrusive or 'Red Reset' configuration download the Supervisor and target panels maintain
the mimic/control session.
4.12.7 Input / Output Level Control
The PD4225 Supervisor Key Panel, with attached PD4203 Level Control Panels, can provide a
combination of input and output level control for the program sources, destinations or other physical
ports. A maximum of 80 separate level controls can be applied to a nominated range of ports. The Level
Control Panels are centred at 0dB and can provide a range of -70dB to +12dB.
It is recommended that the level controls be mapped to a contiguous range of ports, for ease of
operation, and it is also recommended that the program source DAKs are also configured as a
contiguous range. This allows each level control to map physically to the program source Extension
Panel DAK above or below it.
NOTE: The input and output port details that are to be controlled by the PD4225 I/O Level Control
capabilities are factory set on request and can only be modified by Vitec Group Communications.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 123
4.13 PD4232RBL LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder (3RU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Microphone Socket
Level Control
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Indicator LED
Loudspeaker
Auxiliary Volume Control
Auxiliary Volume Indicator LEDs
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Main Volume Indicator LEDs
Main Volume Control
Scribble Strip
Soft Pushbutton
Headset Select Pushbutton
Shift Pushbutton
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Headset Socket
Figure 33 - PD4232RBL Front View
4.13.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 or DIN 5 headset connection.
Panel User Guide
Page 124
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.13.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.13.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4232 panel type, operates on the same port as the corresponding LCD key.
However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 125
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.13.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.13.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
Panel User Guide
Page 126
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.13.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.13.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.13.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.13.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 127
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.13.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, counter-clockwise to
decrease the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.13.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.13.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
Panel User Guide
Page 128
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 39: PD4232R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 40: PD4232R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 129
4.13.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.13.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
Panel User Guide
Page 130
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on an yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.13.13 Headset Socket
The 5 pin DIN Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional
microphone and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 131
4.14 PD4295MCI LCD Desktop Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
Headset Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
7
8
9
10
11
12
Headset Select Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Reply Key
Loudspeaker
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Figure 34 - PD4295MCI Front View
NOTE: Microphone is shown here for illustrative purposes only. Contact Vitec Group Communications
for details of suitable products.
4.14.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Panel User Guide
Page 132
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
4.14.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.14.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4295MCI panel type, operates on the same port as the corresponding LCD key.
However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 133
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.14.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.14.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
Panel User Guide
Page 134
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.14.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.14.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.14.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.14.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 135
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.14.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.14.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.14.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Panel User Guide
Page 136
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 41: PD4295MCI DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 42: PD4295MCI Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 137
4.14.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.14.13 Key Action
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
Panel User Guide
Page 138
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.14.14 Headset Socket
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 139
4.15 PD4296MCI LCD Desktop Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
Microphone Socket
XLR5 Headset Socket
Crosspoint Level Control
Shift Pushbutton
Main Volume Control
Microphone Mute Pushbutton
7
8
9
10
11
12
Headset Select Pushbutton
Soft Pushbutton
Auxiliary Volume Control
Reply Key
Loudspeaker
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Figure 35 - PD4296MCI Front View
4.15.1 Microphone Socket
Insert the optional microphone into this socket. The detachable microphone is connected via a 3-pin
screw locking DIN connector.
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
Panel User Guide
Page 140
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with XLR 5 headset connection.
4.15.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
4.15.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4296MCI panel type, operates on the same port as the corresponding LCD key.
However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 141
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
4.15.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
4.15.5 Microphone Mute Pushbutton
Press the Microphone Mute Pushbutton to mute the active microphone. The red LED is illuminated whilst
the microphone is muted. Another press will re-enable the microphone.
Panel User Guide
Page 142
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
4.15.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output from the loudspeaker unless the Headset Select is engaged.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
4.15.7 Headset Select Pushbutton
The Headset Select Pushbutton is used to select headset operation. The red LED is illuminated to
indicate that the headset microphone is active and the detachable microphone and loudspeaker are
muted.
4.15.8 Soft Pushbutton
Press the pushbutton to enable the Control Panel Soft Mode operation. The red LED is illuminated.
Another press will return the Control Panel to normal operation.
Consult the Section “LCD Key Panel Soft Mode” for Soft Mode programming description.
4.15.9 Auxiliary Volume Control
Turn the Auxiliary Volume Control clockwise to increase the auxiliary channel volume, or anti-clockwise
to decrease the volume. The auxiliary channel is not always used.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Auxiliary level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of 10.0
(approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default setting for both
controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 143
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
4.15.10 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
4.15.11 Reply Key
This DAK is designated to respond to any unscheduled calls. The green LCD indicator on the REPLY
Key only flashes to signal the presence of an unscheduled call, when a DAK is unavailable, (i.e. to
indicate that the call can only be responded to by the Reply Key).
The Reply Key can only respond to the call mnemonic displayed. All other incoming calls are placed in
a queue and have to be accessed in turn. The latest call is placed at the front of the queue. The maximum
number of calls in this queue is ten.
If the DAK is used to respond to a call, then the Reply Key displays the next call in the queue.
4.15.12 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Panel User Guide
Page 144
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 43: PD4296MCI DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 44: PD4296MCI Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 145
4.15.12.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
4.15.12.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
Panel User Guide
Page 146
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
4.15.13 Headset Socket
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required.
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 147
5 LCD Extension Panels
5.1 lPD4230R Half Width LCD Extension Panel (1RU)
1
2
3
4
Shift mode LED
Crosspoint Level Control
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
5
6
7
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Shift Pushbutton
Figure 36 - PD4230R Front View
Panel User Guide
Page 148
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
1
2
3
4
Shift mode LED
Crosspoint Level Control
Talk Tally LED
Listen Tally LED
5
6
7
Reply Key
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Shift Pushbutton
Figure 37 - PD4230RV Front View
The PD4230R panel is available in versions for horizontal and vertical mounting. The descriptions given
below apply to both types.
5.1.1 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 149
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
5.1.2 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch operates on the same port as the corresponding LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch
can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
Panel User Guide
Page 150
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
5.1.3 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
Pressing and holding the auxiliary control pot switch shows the current level setting for each DAK. There
is no LED indication for this switch action.
A panel fitted with a PDE4537 options card can have an external line
level auxiliary input.
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
5.1.4 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Table 45: PD4230R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 151
Table 45: PD4230R DAK Operation
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 46: PD4230R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
5.1.4.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
Panel User Guide
Page 152
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
5.1.4.2 Key Action and Call Signalling
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on an yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 153
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
Panel User Guide
Page 154
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
5.2 lPD4231R Half Width LCD Control Panel (1RU)
1
2
3
4
Main Volume Control
Listen Tally LED
Talk Tally LED
Crosspoint Level Control
5
6
7
Direct Access Key (DAK)
Shift LED
Shift Pushbutton
Figure 38 - PD4231R Front View
The PD4231R panel is available in versions for horizontal and vertical mounting. The descriptions given
below apply to both types.
5.2.1 Optional Microphone
An optional microphone can be connected to the unit via the rear D-type connector (requires additional
interface equipment). For further details see the installation guide (part no STA 0379)
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable Microphone
options.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 155
Vitec Group Communications can offer three different types type of
microphones - 100mm, 340mm and 490mm goosenecks.
All panels are available with DIN 5 headset connection.
5.2.2 Crosspoint Level Control
Each DAK has a corresponding pot switch, located directly above it. Switch operation is described in the
next section.
Turning a pot switch above a DAK, clockwise or counter-clockwise causes the cross-point level to
increase or decrease, respectively. The cross-point level indicator changes to indicate the new crosspoint level setting.
The pots also operate in SOFT mode, but there is no cross-point level indicator on the display.
5.2.3 Pot Switch Operation
A pot switch, on the PD4231 and PD4231V panel types, operates on the same port as the corresponding
LCD key. However, pressing a pot switch can only make listen routes.
In this mode, a pot switch configuration is assumed from the corresponding LCD key in accordance with
the following rules:
i)
CMAPS configuration data is copied from the LCD key to the pot switch (excluding DCC programming) provided that there is no protection on listen access to the port,
Panel User Guide
Page 156
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
ii)
Pot switches cannot be locally or remotely configured, but take on the same listen access capabilities as centrally configured keys.
The key action of a pot switch is 'latch only'.
5.2.4 Shift Pushbutton
The Shift pushbutton toggles between the Main Page and the additional DAK assignments of the Shift
Page. The red LED will flash when a call is detected for an assignment on the page not currently
displayed. When that page is accessed, the LED will illuminate.
NOTE: SOFT Mode can be entered when the Shift Page is selected, allowing local assignment of the
Shift Page DAKs. However, the Shift Page MUST be selected before SOFT Mode is entered as the Shift
pushbutton is only functional in normal intercom mode.
5.2.5 Microphone Mute
A microphone mute facility can be added to the panel via the D-type connector at the back (requires
additional hardware). The red LED is illuminated whilst the microphone is muted.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 157
5.2.6 Loudspeaker
Audio is output can be added using the D-type connector at the rear of the panel (additional hardware
required).
Contact Vitec Group Communications for suitable External Loudspeaker options
Your panel loudspeaker reduces volume automatically when a talk key
is pressed. This is to help reduce the chance of howlround (audio
feedback) occurring.
5.2.7 Main Volume Control
Turn the Main Volume Control clockwise to increase the intercom volume, anti-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
The current setting of either the Main or Auxiliary Volume Control is displayed as a level bar on the Reply
Key, above the Reply Key text. Turning these controls clockwise or counter-clockwise, increases or
decreases the length of the relevant control bar.
The most recently moved control is displayed. If the Auxiliary Volume level setting is displayed and the
Auxiliary Volume Control is static for 2 seconds, the display reverts to showing the Main Volume level
setting. (The auxiliary level bar is displayed as a broken line to distinguish it from the main level bar).
Main level indicator
REPLY
The level bars are graded in 0.5 unit steps from a minimum setting of 0.0 (off) to a maximum setting of
10.0 (approximately +12 dB). Each 0.5 unit step corresponds to 1 pixel of the level bar. The default
setting for both Main and Auxiliary Volume controls is 5.0 (approximately 0 dB).
Pressing the Main Volume Control invokes loudspeaker cut. The green LED above the Reply Key is
illuminated while the loudspeaker is cut.
5.2.8 Direct Access Key (DAK)
The 4000 Series LCD Key Panels have Direct Access Key (DAK) pushbuttons. These DAKs are used
to make Listen and/or Talk routes to and from the Control Panel or other audio connections. The DAK
can also be assigned to trigger a control event from either the Control Panel or the matrix.
The pushbutton operation is selectable from a range of options and set via the Configuration and Master
Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton actions include:
Panel User Guide
Page 158
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 47: PD4231R DAK Operation
Latch
When a DAK is pressed and released, it latches in the
engaged position. Pressing the DAK again disengages it.
Non-Latch
When a DAK is pressed and held depressed, it automatically
disengages when released.
Latch/Non-Latch
A combination of the two above such that a quick press will
latch the button and a slow press will be the non-latch action.
Dual Talk/Listen
When a DAK is momentary pressed, it makes a latched Listen Route. The DAK can then be pressed and held to make a
Talk Route at the same time, and released to unmake the
Talk Route. A second momentary press disengages the DAK
and the latched Listen Route.
Interlock Group
A DAK can be assigned to any one of eight interlock groups
A - H. Within an interlock group only one DAK may be active
at any one time. If a DAK in a given group is pressed whilst
another DAK in the same group is already active the currently active key is deactivated and the key pressed
becomes active.
The Direct Access Keys can be programmed with a range of attributes as set in the Configuration and
Master Assignment Programming System (CMAPSi) workstation software. The pushbutton attributes
are:
Table 48: PD4231R Pushbutton Attributes
Talk Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the source panel to the desired destinations. Normally used for communication from one panel to another.
Listen Only
A single DAK press causes an audio route to be made
from the destination. Used when listening to an external
audio signal (not originating from a Control Panel) is
required.
Talk and Listen
A single DAK press causes a bi-directional audio route to
be made between the source panel and the destinations.
Used between panels and also with certain external audio
signals.
Talk & Forced
Listen
This is similar to Talk and Listen except that the Listen
route is permanently made. The operator need only press
the DAK to talk.
NOTE: For the above functions, the destination can be a single or group of panels, or a single or group
of external sources.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 159
5.2.8.1 Key Layout and Cross-point Level Indicator
The LCD key display of a configured DAK has 3 sections:
i)
Scaleable cross-point level indicator,
ii)
First 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field,
iii) Second 5 characters of the key assignment's directory entry description field.
C ro s s p o in t le v e l in d ic a to r
C h a r a c te rs 1 - > 5 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
D IR E C
TOR
C h a ra c te r s 6 - > 1 0 o f
d ir e c to r y e n try
d e s c rip tio n fie ld
A cross-point level indicator is a line of pixels representing the current cross-point level setting (0.0
10.0). As the setting is increased, the number of pixels in the line increases.
-
A cross-point level indicator is only displayed for a configured DAK when the panel is operating in normal
intercom mode or cross-point level control mode. The indicator is not displayed in SOFT mode.
5.2.9 Key Action
The following colour schemes apply for LCD key switches:
Panel User Guide
Page 160
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
i)
Non-active DAK has black text on a yellow background,
ii)
Active 'talk only' DAK has red text on a black background,
iii) Active 'listen only' DAK has green text on a black background,
iv) Active 'talk and listen' DAK has red text on a black background. The green LED on the associated
pot switch is also illuminated.
NOTE: When an incoming call is present, the LCD key flashes to indicate that the LCD key should be
pressed to respond to the call.
If the pot switch (configured with a valid port entry) is pressed, both red and green switch LEDs are
illuminated.
5.2.10 Headset Socket
The 5 pin Headset Socket is used to connect an optional headset for use when the optional microphone
and loudspeaker are not required (connector on rear of panel).
(Headsets should be used in areas where a number of control panels are used in close proximity, this
should avoid any possibility of howlround occurring).
Consult the Vitec Group Communications Installation Guide for further details.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 161
6 Intelligent Control Panel Features
6.1 DIAL Mode
6.1.1 Intelligent Control Panel
The Intelligent Control Panel can be used dial to external telephone lines. Calls are originated by
pressing the panel DAK with the 'DIAL' mnemonic and then selecting a DAK programmed to support a
connection to a Telephone Balance Unit, TBU. A DAK's route and control configuration in CMAPSi sets
up the control that causes a telephone line connected to the TBU to go 'off-hook' and to create talk/listen
routes to the port number corresponding to the TBU unit.
Pressing a DIAL DAK automatically enters DIAL mode, from where the mnemonics of all DAKs assigned
as being of type DIAL flash. All other DAK mnemonics remain, but do not flash. The 'REPLY' Key
mnemonic is replaced by the word 'EXIT'. Pressing 'EXIT' at this stage causes the panel to return to
normal operation.
Pressing a DAK with a flashing mnemonic causes the panel to display the digits 0..9 , * and #, to allow
DTMF telephone number dialling. The telephone line is taken 'off-hook' when the DAK is pressed. The
display shows the digits that have been pressed. While a digit pushbutton is pressed the panel
establishes an isolate route to the TBU. The isolate route prevents any listeners to the panel from
hearing the DTMF tones generated during dialling. The panel microphone is also muted during dialling
to prevent external noise from interfering with the DTMF tones.
Pressing the 'RLSE' DAK causes the telephone line to be placed back 'on-hook' and the 'RLSE' text to
be replaced by 'CNCT'. Selecting 'CNCT' causes the telephone line to be taken 'off-hook' again and the
'CNCT' text to be replaced by 'RLSE' once again.
Pressing the 'EXIT' DAK causes the panel to return to normal operation. If the line was 'off-hook' when
'EXIT' was pressed, the selected DIAL type DAK is latched.
A port number corresponding to the TBU line can be accessed by pressing the DIAL type DAK without
having to enter DIAL mode. In this case the line will be held 'off-hook' until no DAKs accessing the same
TBU port are active. Once a telephone call has been established it is possible for another panel to take
over the call, provided that the panel has a DAK with the same TBU port and GPSF programming.
On entering DIAL mode all LED signalisation is cleared. Pressing a digit pushbutton cause the relevant
digit's DTMF tone to be generated while the pushbutton is pressed. The red LED is lit while the
pushbutton is pressed.
The following sequence of diagrams illustrates how to make and release a call to a telephone line.
CMAPSi has configured DAKs with the mnemonics TEL1 and TEL2 as DIAL DAKs.
If enabled, busy signalisation indicates that DIAL DAKs are active.
oo
oo
oo
oo
xo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
--
--
--
--
CAM1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
DIAL
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TEL1
TEL2
--
--
--
RPLY
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press DIAL DAK
TEL1 and TEL2 flash.
Panel User Guide
Page 162
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
RPLY key mnemonic is replaced by EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
--
--
--
--
CAM1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
--
--
--
--
--
DIAL
--
--
--
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
"TEL1" "TEL2"
oo
Select TEL1, dial display is shown.
All DAK signalisation is cleared
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
*
6
7
8
9
0
#
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
DIAL
oo
oo
:
RLSE
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Start dialling numbers
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
*
6
7
8
9
0
#
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
DIAL
:089
8
RLSE
oo
oo
oo
oo
Issue 1.4
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Panel User Guide
Page 163
Press RLSE to cancel call and go on-hook
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
DIAL
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
:
CNCT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press CNCT to go off-hook and start dialling again
Dial telephone number (e.g. 01727871200)
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
*
6
7
8
9
0
#
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
DIAL
:012
oo
oo
2381 5000
RLSE
oo
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press EXIT key to return to DAK mode
oo
oo
oo
oo
xo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
--
--
--
--
CAM1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
DIAL
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TEL1
TEL2
--
--
--
RPLY
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
xx
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press TEL1 to cancel telephone call
After a red button reset on the matrix or non-intrusive download configuration from CMAPSi, telephone
line connections are retained and panel displays will return to the state they were in prior to the reset.
After a 'red reset' configuration download from CMAPSi, or a panel power failure, the telephone line
connections go 'on-hook' and the call is disconnected.
6.1.2 LCD Key Panel
DTMF dialling operates as for standard PD4222/PD4222R control panels, using a CMAPS configured
DIAL key to invoke DIAL mode. A numeric keypad is displayed on the top row of keys for a 2U panel or
on the lower row of text of the keys on a 1U panel. A 2U panel also displays the standard 3 letter groups
associated with the number.
QZ
0
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PRS
TUV
WXY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DIAL:
Enter
*
#
RLSE
EXIT
N o.
2U DIAL Mode Display
Panel User Guide
Page 164
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
DIAL:
0
1
2
3
4
Enter
5
N o.
6
7
8
9
RLSE
EXIT
1 U DIAL Mode Display
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 165
6.2 Soft Mode
6.2.1 Overview
The Intelligent Control Panels can be programmed locally by changing the panel from normal operation
to soft mode, by pressing the SOFT pushbutton.
Soft mode allows the user to personalise the panel by allowing DAKs to be locally assigned and their
attributes set. In use only the options actually available are displayed at any decision point, giving the
operator clear guidance at all stages of programming.
6.2.2 Summary of Programming Functions
Pressing the SOFT pushbutton enters the 'Soft' mode of operation for the control panel, which invokes
the Main menu on the LCD. The Main menu offers three options:
•
ASSN - To assign entries to a DAK
•
DIR - To scan the directory for entries
•
PAGE - To call a control panel that has no DAK assignment
•
EXIT - Exit to normal mode of operation
Selecting an option, by pressing the pushbutton below it, accesses the functions provided by that option;
as shown by the menu structure diagrams included with each option description; these diagrams show
the procedure paths followed to execute each function of an option.
Pressing the SOFT pushbutton at any time when in Soft mode returns the panel to normal operation.
Pressing the EXIT Key completes the operation in progress and returns to the menu immediately above
the menu you are exiting, i.e. exiting from a LOAD operation in the ASSN function, returns you to the
Assign function menu. RTN returns to the previous function invoked.
6.2.3 Soft Mode Programming
The facility described in this section allows the re-programming of the Direct Access Key (DAK)
functions, with the exception of:
•
Centrally assigned DAKs (unless configured to be over-written in CMAPS)
•
The REPLY Key (unless configured to be over-written in CMAPS)
•
Shift Page assignments (Extension Panel DAKs)
A directory of names and numbers is received from the central system during reconfiguration to describe
the system. The following example directory is used in this section:
Table 49: Soft Mode Programming Example Directory
Panel User Guide
Page 166
100
GRP1
Group No. 1
400
IFB1
IFB1
600
PROD
Producer
601
FM
Floor Manager
602
VO
Voice Over
603
EDIT
Edit Suite
604
BOOM
Boom Operator
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Table 49: Soft Mode Programming Example Directory
605
SND
Sound Control
606
PA
Prod Assistant
607
VT1
Video Tape 1
608
VIS
Vision Control
609
MCR
Master Control
Room
501
CNF1
Conference 1
502
CNF2
Conference 2
6.2.4 Soft Mode Options
The following options are available in soft mode:
SOFT MODE
ASSN
DIR
CALL
EXIT
6.2.5 Control Panel Programming Procedures
Pressing the SOFT pushbutton changes the control panel to soft mode and a menu is displayed on the
LCD, as illustrated:
SOFT:
Select
ASSN
DIR
Option
CALL
---
---
---
EXIT
This is the Main (Level 1) menu which displays the following programming options:
ASSN
(Assign) This allows you to assign functions to blank DAK.
DIR
(Directory) Allows viewing of centrally configured directory names and
numbers.
CALL
Allows you to make (and remove) calls to designated ports.
EXIT
Exits from SOFT mode.
Each menu option can be selected by pressing the DAK directly beneath the option displayed.
6.2.5.1 The Assign Option
When the assign option is entered from the main menu the display changes to show the function options
available, as follows.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 167
SOFT
MODE
ASSN
LOAD
DIR
KEY
ENTRY
ADD
EXIT
DIR
LIST
KEY
ENTRY
1
CALL
ATTR
DEL
EXIT
KEY
ENTRY
EXIT
TALK
EXIT
LSTN
T+FL
T+L
EXIT
AND
TO
DIR
KEY
ENTRY
EXIT
1
DOWN
KEYPAD
ENTRY
DIR
1
UP
KEY
ENTRY
DEL
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
KEY:
1
EXIT
EXIT
Transfers to the DIRECTORY option
KEYPAD ENTRY - Dial Keypad entry
EXIT
KEY ENTRY - DAK entry
NOTE: Some options may not be displayed if they are not valid in a particular situation, e.g. LOAD, ADD,
ATTR and DEL are only shown if locally assigned DAKs are present.
Table 50: Assign Option Functions
ASSN:
Select
Option
LOAD
ADD
LIST
DEL
ATTR
---
---
LOAD
Loads entries to a DAK assignment and replaces old entry.
ADD
Adds new entries to a DAK assignment.
DEL
Deletes all entries from a selected DAK.
ATTR
Allows talk/listen status of a DAK to be changed.
EXIT
Exits from Assign to the Main menu.
EXIT
The Assign functions allow the operator to change or manipulate the entries on DAKs, which have not
been centrally configured.
Panel User Guide
Page 168
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
6.2.5.2 Using the Load/Add Function
When using the LOAD function to assign entries to a DAK, any previously locally assigned entries will
be deleted when the new list of entries are assigned. The last entered mnemonic is always displayed.
When using the ADD function to assign entries to a DAK, the new entries are added to any existing ones.
Pressing the LOAD or ADD pushbuttons at the Assign menu displays the following menu:
Table 51: Load or Add Functions
LOAD: (or
ADD)
---
DIR
---
---
---
DIR
Allows directory entry selection.
EXIT
Exits to the Main menu.
---
---
EXIT
At this stage the number to be assigned is entered; dial display (as shown below) or via the directory.
Directory entries are selected by pressing the DIR pushbutton and using the scroll keys. When the
correct directory entry is found, pressing the RTN pushbutton selects it and returns to the LOAD menu.
Table 52: Dial Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
*
When the number has been entered the display changes to show the following:
LOAD:
608
---
DIR
AND
Pressing the AND option allows additional numbers to be added to the
assignment entry; to create groups for example. Up to four entries can be
loaded or added to a DAK assignment by using the AND function. The
last entry is displayed on the top line of the LCD display. A total of up to
four entries can be assigned to a DAK by repeated use of the ADD function.
TO
PROD
---
AND
TO
---
---
EXIT
Pressing the TO option changes the display, which allows the entries to be
assigned to the desired DAK, as follows:
---
FM
VTI
---
SND
---
GRP1
CNF1
---
---
BOOM
---
---
EXIT
This example display shows a number of previously assigned DAK's and unassigned DAKs (shown by
dashes). The DAKs available for assignment will flash when the TO pushbutton is pressed.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 169
Pressing the desired (flashing) DAK completes the assignment of the entry to that DAK.
Press EXIT to return to the Assign function menu.
6.2.5.3 Using the List Function
A list of all entries assigned to a DAK can be viewed by pressing LIST pushbutton at the Assign menu.
The display changes to show all of the DAK assignments, with those available for listing flashing. To
select a DAK for listing press the corresponding DAK. The display changes to show the first entry, the
talk/listen status and a number of options as shown in the example below.
608
VIS
Vision
Control
---
DOWN
---
DEL
---
(Talk
Listen
status)
---
---
EXIT
If more than one entry has been assigned to the DAK, pressing DOWN displays the next entry in the list
and an UP option appears on the display. The display can be scrolled up and down the list as required
using these two pushbuttons. When the display reaches the bottom of the list the DOWN option is not
available and DOWN is deleted from the display.
The DEL function is used to delete the entry from a locally configured DAK. If there are still entries
remaining then the next entry will be displayed, otherwise the display changes to show the (now) blank
DAK and EXIT flashes.
EXIT returns to the Assign function menu.
NOTE: Talk and Talk/Listen status entries use upper case letters for the mnemonic labels while Listen
Only status entries are shown by lower case letters.
6.2.5.4 Using the Delete Function
Pressing the DEL pushbutton at the Assign menu changes the display to show all of the DAK
assignments as shown in the example below.
PROD
---
FM
---
---
SND
---
GRP1
CNF1
---
VTI
BOOM
---
---
EXIT
The DAKs that can have their entries deleted will flash.
To delete a pushbutton assignment, press the DAK to be deleted; the assignment will be removed from
the display to confirm the operation. The other assignments that can be deleted continue to flash,
enabling them to be deleted if desired. If there are no more assignments to delete EXIT will flash.
Press EXIT to return to the Assign function menu.
6.2.5.5 Changing the Talk/Listen Status
Press ATTR from the ASSN menu, if displayed.
ATTR
TALK
LSTN
T+L
T+FL
EXIT
Pressing either the TALK, LSTN, T+L or T+FL options enables the status of a DAK to be changed to
Talk, Listen, Talk/Listen or Talk/Forced Listen correspondingly; the display changes to show the DAK
attribute. DAKs that can have their Talk/listen status changed will flash. Those DAKs, which cannot have
their attribute changed using the Soft mode facility are:
Panel User Guide
Page 170
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
•
DAKs with Master Talk (500) as their first entry
•
DAKs which are in the latched position when Soft mode is entered
•
DAKs which are centrally assigned
The DAK required to be changed is then selected by pressing the corresponding pushbutton. The
selected DAK will stop flashing. If you do not wish to change the status of any of the remaining DAKs
then press EXIT to return to the Assign menu.
The new status of the DAK is indicated by its mnemonic label as follows:
Upper Case
Talk or Talk/Listen status
Lower Case
Listen Only status
Leading Capital
Talk + Forced Listen
Press EXIT to return to the Assign function menu.
6.2.5.6 The Directory Facility
* RTN
Returns to the Load menu of the Assn option if the DIR option has been
entered from the main menu. If the DIR option has been entered from any
other soft mode function, RTN will return to that function, continuing that
function's operation.
Pressing the DIR option enters the Directory and the following (example) menu is displayed.
100
GRP1
Group1
UP
DOWN
LIST
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
TOP
MID
Issue 1.4
END
RTN
EXIT
Panel User Guide
Page 171
The top line shows the first entry in the directory and the bottom line gives the menu options available,
as follows:
UP/DOWN
Shows the next entry in the directory
LIST
Lists the entries in a displayed group
TOP
Moves to the top entry of the directory
MID
Moves to the middle entry of the directory
END
Moves to the last entry in the directory
RTN
*see above
EXIT
Returns to the Main menu.
NOTE: Depending upon the position within the directory, some of the function options may be
unavailable.
The directory entries are listed in numerical order. When the directory display is scrolled down, the option
UP appears to allow the viewing of previous entries. The end of the directory is indicated by the DOWN
option being removed from the display. The LIST pushbutton displays the first entry in the group as
shown below:
609
MCR
UP
DOWN
Master
Control
Room
RTN
UP/DOWN
Scrolls up and down the group
RTN
Returns to the point where LIST was pressed
EXIT
Exits from DIR option
EXIT
If a numeric pushbutton is pressed in the directory option, DIRECTORY SEARCH mode is entered. A
directory number may be entered on the dial-pad; when the digits have been entered the normal
directory function is re-entered at the new entry. If the system is part of a network of several systems
then the panel expects a four digit number to be dialled (i.e. a remote panel destination). If only a three
digit number is to be entered (i.e. a local destination) the TAKE option should be pressed to complete
the operation, as shown below:
Directory
search:
608
---
---
---
---
TAKE
---
RTN
RTN
Returns to normal directory without jumping to a new entry
EXIT
Exits the directory function
EXIT
6.2.5.7 The Call Facility
The CALL facility is implemented in SOFT mode, as shown in the diagrams below. The routes made to
the called party are controlled by the Access to This Port section in the called port's Attributes in CMAPS.
Panel User Guide
Page 172
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
SOFT : Select Option
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
ASSN
DIR
PAGE
CALL
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Select CALL mode option
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
CALL : Enter Numbe r
CLR
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Enter dial code using 'dial-pad'
NOTE : EXIT pushbutton causes return to DAK display, not the top level of SOFT mode
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
CALL : 600
CLR
oo
oo
oo
TAKE
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press CLR to allow editing of the dial code
Enter new dial code
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
CALL : 602
CLR
oo
oo
oo
TAKE
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
Press TAKE to call selected port
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
CALL : 602
CLR
oo
oo
oo
END
oo
oo
Issue 1.4
oo
oo
oo
EXIT
oo
oo
oo
Panel User Guide
Page 173
Press END to remove call or.
Press EXIT to return to normal operation, without disconnecting the call.
6.2.5.8 Programming Examples
The following procedures provide examples of the basic programming tasks performed on the control
panel. These examples are given to help familiarise the user with Soft mode programming, using a preconfigured system directory.
1) Assigning a DAK to a Destination
To program a DAK for a new destination:
1.
Press SOFT Mode pushbutton; the LED illuminates to indicate Soft mode.
2.
Press the ASSN option pushbutton, followed by the LOAD pushbutton when the new menu
appears.
3.
Dial in the required destination number. If the destination number is not available, the message
INVALID is displayed.
OR
4.
Press the DIR pushbutton and scroll through the directory using the Up and Down pushbuttons
until the desired destination is displayed. Select the entry for assignment by pressing the RTN
pushbutton.
5.
Press the TO pushbutton and observe that the mnemonics of the unassigned DAKs are flashing.
Press the desired flashing DAK. This assigns the destination selected to that DAK.
6.
Press the EXIT pushbutton to return to the Assign function menu or press the SOFT Mode pushbutton to exit from soft mode, with the new assignment in operation. The SOFT Mode LED extinguishes to indicate return to normal mode.
2) Assigning a Group of Destinations to a DAK
1.
Press SOFT Mode pushbutton the LED illuminates to indicate Soft mode.
2.
Press the ASSN pushbutton, followed by the LOAD pushbutton when the new menu appears.
3.
Dial in the number of the first destination. This number may also be selected from the directory as
explained in the previous example.
4.
Press the AND pushbutton followed by the next destination number). This number may also be
selected from the directory as explained in the previous example.
5.
Repeat the process by pressing the AND pushbutton and entering the next number in the group.
6.
Finally, press the AND pushbutton and enter the last number in the group. The AND pushbutton is
extinguished when four entries have been made.
7.
Press the TO pushbutton and observe that the DAKs available for assignment are flashing.
8.
Choose and press a DAK. Further DAKs can be assigned until EXIT is pressed. EXIT will flash
when no DAKs are left to assign.
9.
Press EXIT to return to the Assign function menu or press the SOFT Mode pushbutton to exit from
soft mode, with the new assignment in operation. The SOFT Mode LED extinguishes to indicate
return to normal mode. The display will show the last assignment of the group above the selected
DAK.
Panel User Guide
Page 174
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
6.3 LCD Key Panel Soft Mode
6.3.1 Overview
SOFT mode is invoked by pressing the SOFT button. The SOFT button LED is illuminated while the
panel operates in SOFT mode. All SOFT mode messages and options are displayed on the 2 rows of
display provided by the bottom row of keys on a 2U panel. The top row of keys on a 2U panel displays
a keypad for the modes that require numeric entries. Numeric entry for a 1U panel is described later.
Exiting SOFT mode, either by pressing the SOFT button or the EXIT option from the top level menu of
SOFT mode options, saves the local key assignments to flash memory. There is about a 1 second delay
in response to the SOFT button or EXIT option press as the flash memory update is executed. The local
key assignments are restored from flash memory when a panel is powered up.
6.3.2 Summary of Programming Functions
When SOFT mode is invoked the following key options are displayed:
SOFT:
ASSN
Sel
Opt
DIR
PAGE
CALL
INFO
EXIT
6.3.3 Soft Mode Programming
ASSN Mode
ASSN mode is selected by pressing the key displaying the ASSN option. ASSN mode features are the
same as for the PD4224 control panel and include:
i)
LOAD and ADD for local DAK assignment,
ii)
LIST for viewing local, central and remote DAK assignments,
iii) DEL for deleting local DAK assignments, and
iv) ATTR for changing the talk/listen status of local DAK assignments.
A numeric keypad is not available in ASSN mode for a 1U panel. Entries for local assignment on a 1U
panel are selected using the DIR option and scrolling to the desired directory entry. Pressing the RTN
option in DIR mode returns to ASSN mode, substituting the currently displayed directory entry as the
assignment selection.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 175
A typical display for local DAK assignment in ASSN mode is shown below:
0
1
2
3
4
5
LOAD:
CLR
600
6
7
AND
8
601
DIR
AND
AND
9
602
AND
TO
603
EXIT
DIR Mode
DIR mode is selected by pressing the key displaying the DIR option. The first directory entry, in numeric
order, is displayed. The local system directory is scrolled through by pressing the UP and DOWN keys.
The TOP, MID and END options allow quicker access to the ends of the directory list.
A typical display for DIR mode is shown below:
0
1
2
3
4
5
101
SRCH
GRP1
UP
DOWN
6
7
8
9
ABCDE
FGHIJ
KLMNO
LIST
TOP
MID
END
RTN
EXIT
Numeric directory selection and access to remote system directories is possible by using the SRCH
option or the keypad. The system number of the remote system prefixes remote system numbers. Once
a remote system entry is selected, the UP and DOWN keys scroll through the remote system directory.
The TOP, MID and END options are not available for remote system directory access.
A typical display for remote directory access selection is shown below:
0
1
2
3
4
Srch
5
DIR:
6
7
8
9
3602
CLR
TAKE
EXIT
TAKE
EXIT
2U Display
Srch
0
1
2
3
4
DIR:
5
3602
6
7
8
9
1U Display
A restriction in the number of keys on a 1U panel means that there is not a CLR key option.
Panel User Guide
Page 176
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
PAGE Mode
PAGE mode allows one of three pages of 46 DAKs to be selected for local programming. CMAPS
configuration of DAKs may reduce this number. Centrally configured DAKs are common to all pages.
The DAKs on each page correspond to the main page and shifted page.
The PAGE option is not available if a DAK is pressed on the main or shifted page when SOFT mode is
entered. Selecting the PAGE option flashes the available page numbers; the currently selected page
number does not flash.
PAGE:
P1
Sel
Opt
P2
P3
EXIT
CALL Mode
CALL mode allows routes to be made to and from a port in the local or remote systems by dialling the
number and pressing the CALL option. The routes made to a called party are controlled by the Access
to This Port section in the called port's Attributes in CMAPS. The CALL option is replaced by an END
option once a valid call is made.
A numeric keypad is displayed on the top row of keys for a 2U panel or on the lower row of text of the
keys on a 1U panel.
0
1
2
3
4
CALL:
5
Enter
6
7
8
9
N o.
CLR
CALL
EXIT
CALL
EXIT
2U CALL Mode Display
CALL:
0
1
2
3
4
Enter
5
N o.
6
7
8
9
1U CALL Mode Display
A restriction in the number of keys on a 1U panel means that there is not a CLR key option.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 177
INFO Mode
INFO mode allows the operator to view current panel status information, perform tests on keys and set
up loudspeaker mute, microphone gain and side-tone parameters. After a matrix black button reset or
local panel '999' reset, the loudspeaker mute, microphone gain and side-tone controls revert to their
default settings.
INFO:
PANEL
KEY
DIAL
50 dB
ON
ON
STAT
TEST
SETUP
MIC
LTONE
RTONE
EXIT
Panel Status
Panel status information is viewed in INFO mode by pressing and holding the key labelled 'PANEL
STAT' (a standard PD4224 control panel accesses panel status information by pressing either the
'engineering' key in SOFT mode, or the INFO button in normal intercom mode). A typical display is
shown below and includes the following information:
•
Date and time of last configuration download,
•
Directory entry for the panel,
•
Remote system status,
•
Configuration map name,
•
Local system number,
•
Software version number.
0
1
LD: 24\
2
06\98
10:25
3
PNL:
4
5
600
ABCDE
NET:
1_34_
6
7
FGHIJ
KLMNO
___
8
9
SYS: 3
MAP:
GRPTL
RG41P
Key Test Feature
The key test feature allows pixels, colours, key operation and LEDs to be tested. The key test feature is
invoked by pressing the key labelled KEY TEST.
All LCD key switches are red by default when running the key test feature. When an LCD key switch is
pressed the pixels on the key are inverted and the key colour changes to green.
Pressing the last LCD key on the panel when its colour is green exits the key test feature.
Panel User Guide
Page 178
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Loudspeaker Mute
The loudspeaker mute status can be changed locally using the INFO feature in SOFT mode. The default
status is not muted (i.e. OFF).
The current loudspeaker mute setting is displayed on the top line of the bottom row of keys in INFO
mode. The setting is toggled between OFF and ON by pressing the key labelled MUTE.
When SOFT mode is exited, lighting the green LED associated with the REPLY key indicates that the
loudspeaker is muted.
Microphone Gain
The headset or main microphone gain can be changed locally in INFO mode. When the headset key is
pressed the headset microphone gain is displayed and can be changed; otherwise the main microphone
gain is displayed. Seven possible levels are available, ranging from 40 ? 80 dB (40dB, 50dB, 55dB,
60dB, 65dB, 70dB and 80dB). The default levels are 65dB for the headset microphone and 50 dB for
the main microphone.
The current microphone gain setting is displayed on the top line of the bottom row of keys in INFO mode.
Stepping through the valid microphone gain values when the key labelled MIC is pressed changes the
setting.
Side-tone Enable
The default side-tone enabled/disabled status can be changed locally in INFO mode. Left and right sidetone channels can be controlled. The default status is ON for both channels.
The current side-tone settings are displayed on the top line of the bottom row of keys in INFO mode. The
settings are toggled between OFF and ON by pressing the keys labelled LTONE or RTONE.
6.4 PD4217 - Intelligent Control Panel
This Section describes the control operation of the PD4217 1RU Intelligent Control Panel, and
concentrates on the different style of this panel control to other 4000 system panels, as well as the new
panel features. This section should be read in conjunction with the sections that cover the operational
features considered standard to all panel types (e.g. REPLY key behaviour and LED feedback).
The PD4217 front panel consists of 14 Direct Access Keys (DAKs), 6 pushbuttons for controlling the
panel operating mode, and a Rotary Encoder to scroll and select options from within the current
operating mode. The number of DAKs expands to 26 by using the SHIFT key. The PD4217 panel
functions in one of three operating modes; Master Level Control Mode, DAK Level Control Mode and
SOFT Programming Mode (the default is Master Level Control Mode).
6.4.1 Rotary Encoder
A Rotary Encoder on the panel, although used primarily for level control, is also used to scroll through
lists of options whilst in one of the three operating modes. A 4 character LED display adjacent to the
encoder is used to display information on the current mode or the value selected by the encoder. The
Rotary Encoder has continuous movement, without any mechanical start and end positions. When
scrolling through the level control values, the encoder display stops scrolling when the limits 0 and 10
have been reached. Further turning of the Rotary Encoder in the same direction, once a limit has been
reached, does not have any action. Scrolling of the SOFT Mode options also stops when the top or
bottom menu option (i.e. "ASSN" or "CALL" respectively) is being displayed. When scrolling the directory
on the display above the DAKs, the Rotary Encoder can be turned continuously in the same direction.
For example, after the last entry in the directory has been reached the display wraps around to the top
of the directory again. Similarly the DAK entry attribute options (Talk, Listen etc..) wrap around when they
are scrolled.
The Rotary Encoder is sensitive to the speed of rotation. A quick turn will increase the scrolling rate to
allow faster movement to selections that are 'further away'.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 179
6.4.2 Level Control
Audio level is adjusted by turning the Rotary Encoder while in Master Level Control Mode or Level
Control Mode. The changing value is displayed above the Rotary Encoder or above the DAK being
pressed. Each level control has a range of 0.0 (off) to 10.0 (+12dB approximately), and is adjusted in
steps of 0.5. A value of 5.0 corresponds to approximately 0dB.
The encoder is turned in a clockwise direction to increase a level and counter-clockwise to decrease the
level. When the value 0.0 is displayed, further counter-clockwise movement of the encoder does not
affect the output level or the display (also clockwise movement when 10.0 is displayed).
6.4.2.1 Master Level Control Mode
After a power cycle the panel enters Master Level Control Mode. The display above the Rotary Encoder
shows the current output level, which defaults to 3.0 after a panel cold-start initialisation. The LED
displays above the first 13 DAKs show any centrally assigned mnemonics, and DAK 14 is the REPLY
key. The red LEDs adjacent to the SOFT, LEVEL and SHIFT Pushbuttons are all off.
In Master Level Control Mode a pressed DAK carries out the actions of the assignments on that key. The
central configuration utility has configured the latching, momentary, interlocking ability of each
pushbutton.
The Master Level can also be altered from another mode while the REPLY key is in use. Moving the
Rotary Encoder displays the Master Level on the Rotary LED Display and allows the value to be
adjusted. If the Rotary Encoder is static for 2 seconds after it has been moved, the display reverts to the
original mode. The display also reverts to its original mode if the REPLY is de-activated. The REPLY key
must be de-activated before the original mode of operation can resume
6.4.2.2 Auxiliary Level Control Mode
When the LEVEL Pushbutton is pressed Level Control Mode is selected. The display above the Rotary
Encoder shows the current Auxiliary Level preceded by the letter 'A', and the LEVEL Pushbutton red LED
is lit. Level Control Mode can be selected from Master Level Control Mode or SOFT Mode. In Level
Control Mode the Rotary Encoder is used to adjust the audio level of the auxiliary channel or the listen
levels of DAKs. The Alphanumeric LED Displays above the DAKs show any assigned mnemonics, and
DAK 14 is the REPLY key.
The Auxiliary Level defaults to A3.0, after panel initialisation. The Auxiliary Level is adjusted by turning
the Rotary Encoder and the current value is reflected on the Rotary LED. The Auxiliary Level has a range
of A0.0 (off) to A10 (+12dB approximately), adjustable in steps of 0.5. A value of A5.0 corresponds to
approximately 0dB. The level changes 'smoothly' across the range of values.
If there isn't any Rotary Encoder or DAK action for 10 seconds, the panel reverts to Master Level Control
Mode and the red LED on the LEVEL Pushbutton is cleared.
6.4.2.3 Crosspoint Listen Level Mode
A DAK crosspoint listen level can be adjusted when the level key selected and then a valid DAK is
selected and held; the Rotary LED Display changes to show "DAKL" and the display above the pressed
DAK shows the current crosspoint listen level setting. Only one DAK can be selected at a time; any
further DAK presses are ignored until the first DAK has been released.
Turning the Rotary Encoder changes the crosspoint listen level and the current value is reflected on the
display above the DAK The level has a range of 0.0 (lowest level) to 10.0 (+12dB approximately),
adjustable in steps of 0.5. A value of 5.0 corresponds to approximately 0dB. When the panel is initialised,
the level is set to '5.0' by default.
In the case of a port number being assigned to more than one DAK, the average of the level settings is
calculated to give a resultant listen level.
A DAK with a talk function continues to operate if the DAK was pressed before selecting DAK Listen
Level mode. Talk operation cannot be activated once DAK Listen Level mode has been selected.
Panel User Guide
Page 180
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
6.4.3 SOFT Mode
When the SOFT Pushbutton is pressed SOFT Mode is selected, and its red LED is lit. SOFT Mode can
be selected from Master Level Control Mode or Level Control Mode. The Rotary LED Display flashes,
and defaults to "ASSN". The Rotary Encoder is used to scroll through a menu of 5 SOFT Mode facilities.
In the order that they are displayed, the 5 menu selections are:
i)
ASSN
Adds or overwrites local assignments to a DAK
ii)
DEL
Deletes one or all local assignments on a DAK
iii)
ATTR
Changes the talk/listen attributes on a locally assigned DAK
iv)
PAGE
Selects a new local assignment page
v)
CALL
Allows direct dialling to other ports on the system
If either of the menu options, "ASSN" or "CALL", has been scrolled to and is on the display, the Rotary
Encoder Display stops scrolling.
To return to Master Level Control Mode the SOFT Pushbutton is pressed, and the SOFT button LED is
cleared. SOFT Mode is also exited when the LEVEL Pushbutton is pressed to enter Level Control Mode,
or if there has been no Rotary Encoder or DAK activity for 20 seconds. After the time-out Master Level
Control Mode is entered.
6.4.3.1 Directory Scrolling
After panel initialisation, entering ASSN Mode for the first time displays the first entry in the directory.
The red LED below the directory entry number flashes to indicate that the Rotary Encoder will scroll
through the directory in numeric order. An example is shown below.
ASSN
02
0
o o
600
1
o
PT01 TALK Panel 01
2
o o
3
o o
4
o o
5
o o
ADD SAVE QUIT RPLY
6
o o
7
o o
8
o o
9
o o
*
o o
#
o o
o o
o o
Rotary
Encoder
The DAK below the system number scrolls through the system numbers 1 to 8. If a system does not exist
for any of the numbers the display changes to "UNKNOWN SYSTEM" while that system number is
selected. The red LED below the system number flashes while a new system is being selected. Once
the required system number has been found the first port number entry of the remote system is
displayed. Pressing the DAK below the port number will now scroll through the remote system directory
entries.
If a DAK below the mnemonic or the description field is pressed, it is ignored, as it is not possible to scroll
through either a local or remote system in alphabetical order.
The individual port numbers of a group entry in the directory cannot be listed. The CMAPSi software
application is required to obtain this information.
When ASSN Mode is exited the current scrolling mode is saved and used as the default the next time
ASSN Mode is selected. The first directory entry displayed on re-entry to ASSN Mode is the entry
displayed when ASSN Mode was exited previously.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 181
6.4.3.2 ASSN (Assign) Mode
When the Rotary Encoder Display is flashing "ASSN", the unassigned DAK's displays also flash. Any
DAK that is currently active is not available for programming, and its display does not flash.
ASSN Mode is entered when a flashing DAK is selected. The Rotary Encoder Display stops flashing and
displays "ASSN". The Alphanumeric LED Displays above the DAKs show the directory entry
corresponding to the current mode of scrolling.
The display position above the fourth DAK indicates the directory entry's default attribute. Selecting this
DAK allows a local copy of the attribute to be changed using the Rotary Encoder. The centrally
configured directory entry is not affected by any ASSN Mode changes. The DAK's red LED flashes while
the attribute change option is selected.
Panel User Guide
Page 182
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
In the order that they are displayed, the four attribute options are:
•
TALK - Talk only to the directory entry
•
LSTN - Listen only to the directory
•
T+L - Talk and Listen to the directory entry
•
T+FL - Talk and Forced Listen to the directory entry
The DAKs 11 to 13 operate as ADD, SAVE and QUIT keys as described below.
The ADD key stores the current directory entry, with the displayed attribute, to the DAK that was selected
to enter ASSN Mode. When the ADD key is pressed the message "ENTRY ADDED TO KEY" is flashed
on the display. A maximum of six entries can be stored on a DAK.
If an attempt is made to add an entry to a DAK that already has six entries, the error message "NOT
ENOUGH ROOM ON KEY" is displayed over the current directory entry for a period of 1 second. On
returning to Master Level Control Mode the mnemonic displayed over the DAK is that of the last
assignment made to the DAK. A centrally configured DAK that can be locally programmed cannot have
entries added to it unless it already has a local assignment (see SAVE key).
The SAVE key stores the current directory entry, with the displayed attribute, to the DAK that was
selected to enter ASSN Mode. All previous local assignments to the DAK are deleted before the
assignment is made. The panel then returns to the Master Level Control Mode. Centrally configured
assignments on a DAK, that can be locally programmed, can be temporarily overwritten by the SAVE
key, but the central assignments return when the local assignments are removed by the DEL facility.
A directory entry, above the top and below the bottom directory entry, exists that allows all entries
assigned to a DAK to be deleted. The mnemonic field of the entry displays "--" and the description field
displays "No Assignment". The SAVE key 'stores' the entry to the DAK, deleting all previous entries,
before returning to the Master Level Control Mode.
The QUIT key returns the panel to the top level of SOFT Mode without making any further assignments.
Pressing the LEVEL or SOFT Pushbuttons exits the ASSN Mode without making any further
assignments.
6.4.3.3 DEL (Delete) Mode
When the Rotary Encoder Display is scrolled to show "DEL" flashing, the programmable DAKs' displays
also flash. Any DAK that is currently active is not available for programming, and its display does not
flash.
DEL Mode is entered when a flashing DAK is selected. The Rotary Encoder Display stops flashing and
displays "DEL". The display above the DAK numbers 1 to 8 shows the directory entry corresponding to
the first assignment made to the DAK. The entries are scrolled in the order that the assignments were
made to the DAK. There is no alphabetical or numeric order scrolling in DEL Mode.
As for ASSN Mode, the display position above DAK number 4 indicates the assignment entry's attribute.
Selecting this DAK allows the attribute to be changed using the Rotary Encoder. The DAK's red LED
flashes while the attribute change option is selected. When the DAK is de-selected the Rotary Encoder
reverts to scrolling through the DAKs assignments, and its red LED returns to its previous status.
In the order that they are displayed, the 4 attribute options are:
•
TALK - Talk only to the directory entry
•
LSTN - Listen only to the directory
•
T+L - Talk and Listen to the directory entry
•
T+FL - Talk and Forced Listen to the directory entry
The DAKs 11 to 13 operate as SUB, DEL and QUIT keys as described below.
The SUB key deletes the displayed entry from the DAK that was selected to enter DEL Mode. Once the
last entry on a DAK has been deleted, the message "NO FURTHER ASSIGNMENTS" is displayed.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 183
The QUIT key exits DEL Mode, and returns the panel to the top level of SOFT Mode.
The DEL key deletes all assignments from the DAK and the panel returns to the Master Level Control
Mode. On returning to Master Level Control Mode the DAK mnemonic displayed is either blank ( -- ) or
returns to the mnemonic of a centrally configured assignment made to the DAK.
The QUIT key returns the panel to the top level of SOFT Mode without making any changes.
Pressing the LEVEL or SOFT button exits DEL Mode without making any further assignments.
6.4.3.4 ATTR (Talk/Listen) Mode
When the Rotary Encoder Display is scrolled to show "ATTR" flashing, the programmable DAKs'
displays also flash. Any DAK that is currently active or doesn't have any local assignments is not
available for programming, and its display does not flash.
ATTR Mode is entered when a flashing DAK is selected. The Rotary Encoder Display stops flashing and
displays "ATTR". The DAK's display changes to show the current attribute of the DAK. If the DAK has
more than one entry, the attribute displayed is that of the first entry. It is possible to select more than one
flashing DAK at a time.
After the first movement of the Rotary Encoder, all the selected DAKs have their displays changed to
show the first attribute option, "TALK". The Rotary Encoder scrolls through the available attributes listed
below.
•
TALK - Talk only to the directory entry
•
LSTN - Listen only to the directory
•
T+L - Talk and Listen to the directory entry
•
T+FL - Talk and Forced Listen to the directory entry
An attribute is assigned to a DAK by de-selecting the DAK when it is displaying the required attribute.
The attribute is assigned to each entry on that DAK. When all DAKs have been de-selected the display
above the Rotary Encoder flashes "ATTR" again. The Rotary Encoder now scrolls through the SOFT
Mode facilities.
The current attribute of a DAK can be viewed by selecting and de-selecting the DAK without adjusting
the Rotary Encoder. The attribute is displayed while the DAK is active.
To change the attribute of the individual entries of a DAK , DEL Mode is used.
6.4.3.5 PAGE Mode
When the Rotary Encoder Display is scrolled to show "PAGE" flashing, the displays above DAKs 1 to 6
show the page numbers "PG1" to "PG6", respectively. The current page number is steady and the other
page numbers flash.
A new page cannot be selected if a route is active on the current page of assignments, including the
shifted page. If a selection is attempted, the message "ROUTE ESTABLISHED ON CURRENT PAGE"
is displayed for a period of 1 second. A separate shift page is available for each page number.
When a valid page selection is made the new page number becomes steady and the old page number
flashes with the others.
The Rotary Encoder Display flashes "PAGE" throughout PAGE Mode.
The Rotary Encoder still scrolls through the SOFT Mode facilities when PAGE Mode is selected.
6.4.3.6 CALL Mode
When the Rotary Encoder Display is scrolled to show "CALL" flashing, the displays above DAKs 1 to 10
either become blank or display a number from a previous call. DAK 13 displays "CALL" if CALL Mode
hasn't a current active route, or displays "END" if there is an active route. DAK 14 is the REPLY key.
The first 10 DAKs operate as digit keys 0 to 9, indicated by the legends on the front panel. The SOFT
Mode time-out is disabled in CALL Mode.
Panel User Guide
Page 184
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The Rotary Encoder Display still flashes "CALL" to indicate that the Rotary Encoder will scroll through
the SOFT Mode facilities.
The first digit press clears any previously disconnected called number from the display and starts a new
number above the first DAK. To correct an entry, CALL Mode is exited then re-entered using the Rotary
Encoder. This allows the first digit key press to overwrite the incorrect entry and start a new entry. Port
numbers can be 3 or 4 digits long.
When a number is entered, the CALL key is selected to attempt to establish the route to the port number.
If an invalid number has been entered the display shows the message "INVALID NUMBER" for a period
of one second. After a valid number the CALL key changes to an END key.
The END key terminates the call and reverts to being the CALL key.
After establishing a call, CALL Mode can be exited. The next time CALL Mode is selected the 'END' key
is displayed.
If SOFT Mode is exited the red LED on the SOFT button flashes to indicate that a call is active.
6.4.3.7 DIAL Mode
The Intelligent Control Panel can be used dial to external telephone lines. Calls are originated by
pressing the panel DAK with the 'DIAL' mnemonic and then selecting a DAK programmed to support a
connection to a Telephone Balance Unit, TBU. A DAK's route and control configuration in CMAPS sets
up the control that causes a telephone line connected to the TBU to go 'off-hook' and to create talk/listen
routes to the port number corresponding to the TBU unit.
Pressing a DIAL DAK automatically enters DIAL mode, from where the mnemonics of all DAKs assigned
as being of type DIAL flash. All other DAK mnemonics remain, but do not flash. The 'REPLY' key
mnemonic is replaced by the word 'EXIT'. Pressing 'EXIT' at this stage causes the panel to return to
normal operation.
Pressing a DAK with a flashing mnemonic allows telephone number dialling to start. The telephone line
is taken 'off-hook' when the DAK is pressed. The display shows the digits that have been pressed. While
a digit pushbutton is pressed the panel establishes an isolate route to the port number corresponding to
the TBU unit. The isolate route prevents any listeners to the panel from hearing the DTMF tones
generated during dialling. The panel microphone is dimmed during dialling to prevent external noise from
interfering with the DTMF tones.
DIAG
DIAL :0898
0
o o
1
o o
RLSE EXIT
2
o o
3
o o
4
o o
5
o o
6
o o
7
o o
8
o o
9
o o
*
o o
#
o o
o o
o o
Rotary
Encoder
Pressing the 'RLSE' key causes the telephone line to be placed back 'on-hook' and the 'RLSE' text to be
replaced by 'CNCT'. Selecting 'CNCT' causes the telephone line to be taken 'off-hook' again and the
'CNCT' text to be replaced by 'RLSE' once again.
Pressing the 'EXIT' key causes the panel to return to normal operation. If the line was 'off-hook' when
'EXIT' was pressed, the selected DIAL type DAK is latched.
A port number corresponding to the TBU unit can be accessed by pressing the DIAL type DAK without
having to enter DIAL mode. In this case the line will be held 'off-hook' until no keys accessing the same
TBU port are active. Once a telephone call has been established it is possible for another panel to take
over the call, provided that the panel has a DAK with the same TBU port and the same GPSF
programming.
On entering DIAL mode all LED signalisation is cleared. Pressing a digit pushbutton causes the relevant
digit's DTMF to be generated while the pushbutton is pressed. The red LED is lit while the pushbutton is
pressed.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 185
6.4.4 Shift Page
The shift page increases the number of DAKs on the panel from 14 to 26 ( Note the REPLY Key is not
shifted ). The shift page is selected when the SHIFT button is pressed. The shift button LED is on while
the shift page is selected and the display above the DAKs shows the mnemonics for the DAKs on the
shift page.
Assignments can be made to DAKs on the shift page in SOFT Mode and the listen levels of DAKs on
the shift page can be adjusted in Level Control Mode. Each page number has its own shift page.
The shift page can be selected while in any of the three panel operating modes (Master Level Control,
Level Control and SOFT).
The 'main' page returns after the shift button is de-selected. The shift page LED is cleared and the
display shows the mnemonics of the DAKs on the 'main' page.
6.4.5 Diagnostic Page
The diagnostics page supplies status information about the panel. The information available consists of:
•
System number panel belongs to
•
Directory entry corresponding to panel
•
Software version running on panel
•
Map name of configuration on panel
•
Local control output states of the headset, loudspeaker and microphone
•
Remote system status
DIAG
02
0
o o
600
1
o o
PT01 Panel 01
2
o o
3
o o
4
o o
V:PR G4 1F M:AL PHAT ST
5
o o
6
o o
7
o o
8
o o
C:3F
9
o o
*
o o
N:
#
o o
12______
o o
o o
Rotary
Encoder
The diagnostic page is displayed after the SOFT pushbutton is pressed and held for over a second. The
SOFT Pushbutton LED will light. Initially the Vitec Group Communications copyright message is
displayed for 1 second, this is followed by the Diagnostic Page display. The page is only displayed whilst
the SOFT pushbutton is pressed. When the button is released the panel returns to Master Level Control
Mode.
The Diagnostics Page is not displayed when the SOFT pushbutton is pressed to exit SOFT Mode.
While the diagnostic page is displayed, the LEVEL button can be pressed to show the current crosspoint
level settings. A value in the range 0.0 to 10.0 is shown above each of the configured DAKs.
6.4.6 LED Display Brightness Control
The brightness of the Alphanumeric LED Displays above the DAKs and the Rotary Encoder can be
adjusted. Pressing and holding the SOFT Pushbutton for over a second when in Master Level Control
Mode, displays the Diagnostic Page. While still pressing the SOFT Pushbutton, press the corresponding
DAKs that have a numerical legend to enter a number in the range 101 to 110, this adjusts the brightness
of the displays; 110 corresponds to the brightest setting.
6.4.7 Panel Feature Summary
This section highlights the main feature differences between the PD4217 panel and the 4000 Series II
Control Panels.
Panel User Guide
Page 186
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Rotary Encoder
PD4217
Rotary Encoder has been introduced to allow lists of options to be
scrolled.
Other
Directory viewing and key assignment listing use UP/DOWN keys.
Level Control
PD4217
The main output level, auxiliary channel level and DAK listen level can be
adjusted by selecting the relevant mode and scrolling the display to the
required level.
Other
Individual pots. are required for each DAK and there isn't any display feedback.
REPLY Key
PD4217
The REPLY key is available to the operator at all times.
Other
The REPLY key is only available when the panel is operating outside of
SOFT Mode.
SHIFT Page
PD421
7
There is no restriction to access to the SHIFT page. SOFT Mode is operational and assignments can be made to the DAKs on the SHIFT page.
Other
SOFT Mode is disabled if the SHIFT page is selected.
SOFT Mode Assignments
PD4217
Other
i)
Select the DAK that is to be assigned,
ii)
Use the Rotary Encoder to scroll to the required directory entry,
iii)
Select the SAVE or ADD key to assign the entry to the DAK.
i)
Select ASSN Mode and the LOAD or ADD key,
ii)
Enter the directory entry number and select the TO key,
iii)
Select the DAK(s) to assign the entry.
Directory Viewing
PD4217
The directory entries can be scrolled through by numeric order and by system number.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 187
Other
Directory entries are scrolled in numeric order only using UP, DOWN,
TOP, MID and END keys. Fast access to entries is possible by entering a
directory number.
PAGE Selection
PD4217
Each page has its own SHIFT page with programmable DAKs.
Other:
The SHIFT page occupies two of the pages. The SHIFT page cannot be
programmed so it is common to all pages.
DIAL Mode
PD4217
DIAL Mode is a SOFT Mode feature.
Other
DIAL Mode is available outside of SOFT Mode.
6.5 PD4225R/PD4225 - Router Control Panel
The PD4225 Router Control Panel is identical in appearance to the PD4224 Intelligent Control Panel and
can be used in an almost identical manner, for standard 4000 Series II Talkback operation.
The additional capabilities of the control panel extend to:
•
Remote Audio Control
•
Remote Key Assignment
•
IFB Source to Destination Routing
•
Input / Output Level Control
6.5.1 Remote Assignment Operation
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL - To set up audio routes between a specified source and destination.
REMOTE KEY ASSIGNMENT - To make assignments to DAKs on remote panels.
The two additional options, Remote Audio control (RAUD) and Remote Key Assignment (RKEY) are
displayed on the Soft mode top level menu as follows:
SOFT:
Select
Option
ASSN
DIR
PAGE
---
RAUD
RKEY
---
EXIT
NOTE: It is recommended that the PD4225 Control Panel has the 'Panel Facility, Soft Programming,
Lock Override, Port Type Attribute' set in CMAPSi, to enable the remote programming operations to be
carried out as described.
6.5.2 Remote Audio Control (RAUD)
This facility accepts two individual directory numbers, called the source and the destination, and makes
a specified type of audio route between them.
The source can only be a port in the same matrix and accessed via a three-digit number, (600 to 792);
it cannot be a group or a conference.
Panel User Guide
Page 188
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
The destination can be a three-digit number, addressing a port, group or conference in the same system;
or a four-digit number, addressing a port on another system in the network; the first digit being the
system number and the remaining three digits corresponding to the port within the system.
Once the numbers are entered and the operation is complete, an audio connection is established
between the specified source and destination. The characteristics of this connection can be Talk Only,
Listen (LSTN) Only or Talk and Listen (T+L).
Connection to or from a source can be listed and then individually deleted. This is the only way to delete
connections established using this facility.
6.5.2.1 Operation
Selecting Remote Audio (RAUD) from the Soft mode menu produces the following display:
RAUD
Select
Source
Number
---
DIR
---
---
---
---
---
EXIT
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of local source directory entries only (600 to
983 maximum, dependent upon matrix size).
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows the selection of the 3-digit source number, which may be entered directly from the
displayed dial-pad, or selected from the directory by pressing DIR.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 189
When the source number has been entered the display changes to show the following menu:
RAUD
Select
600
600
PORT
600
---
DIR
LIST
---
CNCT
---
---
EXIT
The first line of the menu displays the selected source number, its mnemonic and directory text.
This menu allows the displayed source number to be changed, using either the displayed dial-pad or the
DIR function.
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
LIST
Allows viewing of audio connections already established using the
Remote Audio facility. Connections can be deleted at this stage (see
next menu).
CNCT
Connect. Changes menu to allow entry of destination numbers (3 or 4
digit), directly using the dial-pad or from the directory by pressing DIR.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
To view current Remote Audio Control operations press LIST, which changes the display to show the
following menu:
RAUD
600,
601
Floor
Manager
UP
DOWN
---
DEL
---
---
RTN
EXIT
The first line of the menu now displays the source number followed by a destination number and its
directory text.
UP/DOWN
Scrolls current Remote Audio Control operations, which have been
set up from the panel.
DEL
Deletes the displayed Remote Audio Control operation.
RTN
Returns to previous menu where the source number may be
altered.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows Remote Audio Control operations set up from the panel to be viewed and optionally
deleted. The UP/DOWN pushbuttons scroll through the list that is arranged in chronological order of the
time at which the route was set up.
Press RTN to return to the previous menu, enabling a destination number to be selected, if desired.
To enter a destination number, press CNCT, which changes the menu to display the following:
RAUD:
600,
Select
Destination
---
DIR
---
---
Panel User Guide
Page 190
---
Issue 1.4
---
RTN
EXIT
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
RTN
Returns to the source selection menu.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows the destination number to be entered using the dial-pad or the DIR function.
When the destination number is entered the display changes to show the following menu:
RAUD:
600,
601
FM
Floor
Manager
---
DIR
---
TALK
LSTN
T+L
RTN
EXIT
The first line of the menu now displays the source number followed by the destination number, its
mnemonic and directory text.
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
TALK
Makes an audio route of 'Talk' only.
LSTN
Makes an audio route of 'Listen' only.
T+L
Makes an audio route of 'Talk and Listen'.
RTN
Returns to a previous menu to re-enter a destination number, if desired.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows the displayed destination number to be changed, using the dial-pad or DIR function.
To execute the Remote Audio Control function between the specified source and destination, select
TALK, LSTN, or T+L. If one or more of these options is not displayed, it is because selected source or
destination ports have Talk/Listen restrictions, specified by the CMAPSi map.
6.5.3 Remote Key Assignment (RKEY)
The Remote Assignment Key can be used to assign DAKs on remote control panels. Control panel DAKs
are reserved for remote assignment via CMAPSi by assigning the reserved directory entry 'RKEY' to
them.
On an Intelligent panel, the mnemonic label on the display changes to reflect the DAK assignment. When
DAKs on an Intelligent Control Panel are designated for remote assignment they are not available for
local assignment.
The remotely assignable DAKs for an Extension Panel, are from 33 to 48, if connected to an Intelligent
Control Panel.
6.5.3.1 Operation
Selecting the Remote Assignment option (RKEY) from the Soft mode menu produces the following
display:
RKEY
Select
Panel
Number
---
DIR
---
---
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
---
Issue 1.4
---
---
EXIT
Panel User Guide
Page 191
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows the selection of the panel to have a DAK assigned remotely. The panel is selected
using its directory number. This number must only be a panel on the local system.
The panel number may be entered directly from the dial-pad or selected from the directory by pressing
DIR.
When the panel number is selected the display changes to show the following menu:
RKEY
609
MCR
Master
Control
Room
---
DIR
LIST
---
ASSN
---
---
EXIT
The first line of the menu displays the selected panel number, its mnemonic and directory text.
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
LIST
Displays existing remote assignments.
ASSN
Assign. Moves to DAK assignment menu.
This menu allows the selected panel number to be changed. To view and optionally delete current
Remote Key assignments, which have been set up from the panel, press LIST.
The display changes to show the following menu:
RKEY
600,
601
UP
DOWN
---
DEL
---
---
RTN
EXIT
The first line of the menu now displays the panel number followed by an assigned DAK number, and
directory text.
UP/DOWN
Scrolls current Remote Key assignments which have been set up
from the panel.
DEL
Deletes the displayed Remote Key assignment.
RTN
Returns to previous menu.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
Press RTN to return to the previous menu, enabling a directory entry to be assigned to a DAK, if desired.
Press ASSN to select a directory entry for assignment to a DAK. The display changes to show the
following menu:
RKEY
609,
Select
Assignment
---
DIR
---
---
Panel User Guide
Page 192
---
Issue 1.4
---
RTN
EXIT
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
RTN
Returns to previous menu.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
The directory entry to be assigned can be a 3-digit number, addressing a panel on the local system, or
a group, conference or IFB. The directory entry can also be a 4-digit number, addressing a panel on
another system in the network.
When the directory assignment is selected the display changes to show the following:
RKEY
600,
601
CENG
Chief
Engineer
---
DIR
---
TALK
LSTN
T+L
RTN
EXIT
The first line of the menu now displays the panel number followed by the assigned directory number, its
mnemonic and directory text.
DIR
Directory. Allows viewing of directory entries.
TALK
Makes status of the assignment 'Talk' only.
LSTN
Makes status of the assignment 'Listen' only.
T+L
Makes status of the assignment 'Talk and Listen'.
RTN
Returns to previous menu.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
This menu allows the assignment entry to be changed, using the dial-pad or DIR function. Select the
Talk/Listen status of the assignment by pressing 'TALK', 'LSTN' or 'T+L'. If one or more of these options
are not displayed, it is because the selected assignment port has Talk/Listen restrictions, specified by
the CMAPSi map.
Selecting the Talk/Listen status changes the display to show the following:
RKEY
609,
607
Talk+
Lstn,Key
---
---
---
---
---
RTN
Returns to previous menu.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
---
RTN
EXIT
The first line of the menu displays the panel number, the assignment entry number and the Talk/Listen
status. 'Key__' indicates that the DAK number may be assigned, using the dial-pad. The valid DAK
number range is 1 to 48, provided that the DAK has been previously reserved via CMAPSi.
When the DAK number is entered the display changes to show the following:
RKEY
609,
608
Talk+
Lstn,
Key 11
---
---
---
---
TAKE
---
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
RTN
EXIT
Panel User Guide
Page 193
TAKE
Executes the Remote Key assignment.
RTN
Returns to a previous menu to re-select a panel number.
EXIT
Exits to Soft mode.
To execute the assignment, press TAKE. In the given example, pressing TAKE executes assignment to
panel 609, directory entry 608, Talk and Listen status, DAK number 11.
The display automatically returns to the first Remote Key assignment menu, allowing another selection,
if desired.
If the attempted assignment is to an invalid DAK, an error message is displayed for a short time. If the
selected panel does not respond within a certain time, an error message is again displayed.
6.5.4 Input / Output Level Control
The PD4225 Router Control Panel, with attached PD4203 Level Control Panels, can provide a
combination of input and output level control for the program sources, destinations or other physical
ports. A maximum of 80 separate level controls can be applied to a nominated range of ports. The Level
Control Panels are centred at 0dB and can provide a range of -70dB to +12dB.
It is recommended that the level controls be mapped to a contiguous range of ports, for ease of
operation, and it is also recommended that the program source DAKs are also configured as a
contiguous range. This allows each level control to map physically to the program source Extension
Panel DAK above or below it.
NOTE: The input and output port details that are to be controlled by the PD4225 I/O Level Control
capabilities are factory set on request and can only be modified by Vitec Group Communications.
6.6 IFB Router Operation
The IFB Router also supports the Remote Audio and Remote Key Assignment functionality which is
described in sections 6.5.1, 6.5.2 and 6.5.3.
The control panel can be configured to provide:
•
31 locally, centrally or remotely configurable IFB destination DAKs,
•
80 centrally or remotely configurable program source DAKs,
•
REPLY Key.
The IFB destination DAKs operate as standard IFBs, as well as selecting an IFB for routing. I.e. interrupt
the foldback between a source and destination by acting as a caller.
The default configuration of an IFB is set up using standard CMAPSi features to assign a destination to
an IFB designation. Only local system IFBs can be used. CMAPSi can also set up default sources,
returns, priority and interrupt levels for an IFB. The Router Control Panel cannot remove the central
assignments.
The Router Control Panel can monitor the output of a selected IFB. If no IFB is selected, the panel can
monitor the input of any currently selected program source.
Main page pushbuttons, except the REPLY, which are not configured as an IFB destination, can be
configured with a port, group and/or conference for normal talkback operation.
Incoming call indication for any program source is allocated to the REPLY Key.
6.6.1 IFB Control Panel Configuration
Using CMAPSi, create a default template for a Router Control Panel, with Key Action settings as follows:
i) IFB assignments on the Main Page DAKs 1-31 are configured to belong to Interlock Group A; the DAKs
are
Panel User Guide
Page 194
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Deactivating, with the Make before break field cleared,
ii) All Extension Panel or Shift Page DAKs are set to Non-Latch.
6.6.2 IFB Destinations
The control panel provides 31 IFB destination DAKs. These DAKs can be locally, centrally or remotely
programmed.
CMAPSi can configure the default sources, destinations, returns, priority and interrupt levels for each
IFB in the system. Any program source that CMAPSi assigns to an IFB is not visible to a Router Control
Panel, and cannot be deleted by a panel. A Router Control Panel can add an additional program source
assignment to the list of CMAPSi default program sources.
ADM monitors and can change the program sources, destinations, returns and interrupt levels of IFBs.
ADM monitors assignments made by Router Control Panels in the system.
IFB destination DAKs are recommended to be interlocked as default. When a new IFB destination DAK
is selected the previous IFB destination DAK is deselected. Therefore, one IFB destination DAK can be
selected at a time. The red LED on an IFB destination DAK is lit while that IFB is selected. The green
LED is lit on any IFB destination DAK that has a program source assigned by the panel.
When an IFB destination DAK is selected, the green LED on any program source DAKs assigned to it
on the Extension Panel or Shift Page is lit. The green LED on any program source DAK not assigned to
this IFB destination is cleared. The panel monitors the IFB by destination or return listen (configured in
CMAPSi panel attributes), if the IFB DAK entry has its listen attribute set. The panel removes any
monitoring that may have been in place for the previous IFB selection.
The Router Control Panel can talk to the selected IFB destination, if the IFB pushbutton has its talk
attribute set. To prevent program sources from being cut or dimmed when the panel is talking to an IFB,
the panel should be configured in the CMAPSi IFB programming section to have a 'Priority Level' of 1.
To prevent the Router Control Panel from talking to any selected IFBs, set the CMAPSi IFB programming
to have a 'Priority Level' of 0.
IFB destination DAKs can be configured as non-interlocking, allowing more than one IFB to be monitored
at a time. The green LED indication on program source DAKs corresponds to the program source
assignments for the last selected IFB destination.
6.6.3 Program Sources
A Router Control Panel can support up to 80 program sources on 4 x 4206 Extension Panels (access to
31 program sources is possible using the SHIFT Page when the corresponding Extension Panels are
not connected).
CMAPSi is used to configure the program source DAKs on the Extension Panels. Only ports used as
program sources are recommended to be used as other assignment types will not be recognised.
A single program source can only be assigned to an IFB at a time. A program source can be assigned
to more than one IFB. The red LED on a program source DAK is lit while the pushbutton is pressed.
The green LED on a program source DAK indicates that the program source is assigned to an IFB
destination. When an IFB destination DAK is selected the green LEDs are lit only on the program source
DAKs assigned to the selected IFB destination.
There is no LED indication showing the current route status. For example, an IFB caller may be
interrupting the program source to IFB destination route.
When there is no IFB destination DAK selected, program source inputs can be monitored. The green
LED is lit on all program source DAKs that have been assigned to an IFB destination. The green LED is
also lit on all IFB destination DAKs that have a program source assignment. Selecting an assigned
program source DAK will extinguish the green LED indication on all IFB destinations that do not have
that program source assigned.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 195
Program source DAKs must be CMAPSi programmed to Listen, to enable monitoring. The panel listens
to the input of the program source while the DAK is pressed. Program source DAKs that are also
programmed to Talk, will talk to the program source port. Selecting a program source DAK lights the red
LED on the DAK. IFB destination DAKs with the program source assigned have their green LED lit. All
other IFB destination DAKs' green LED's are cleared.
6.6.4 Programming Examples
All program source and IFB DAKs are assumed to be configured as talk and listen. No previous program
source assignments exist.
Assigning Program Source to an IFB:
Program
Sources Keys
IFB
Keys
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
1
2
3
oo
oo
2
3
Select IFB DAK 1
Program
Sources Keys
IFB
Keys
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
o
1
Panel listens to IFB destination(s) or return(s)
Panel talks to IFB without dimming program sources
Red LED on IFB DAK 1 is lit
↓
Press and release Program Source DAK 1
Program
Sources Keys
o
1
IFB
Keys
oo
oo
2
3
1
oo
oo
2
3
Program Source configured on DAK 1 is added to IFB 1
Green LED on Program Source DAK 1 is lit
Green LED on IFB destination DAK 1 is lit
↓
Press and release Program Source DAK 2
Panel User Guide
Page 196
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Program
Sources Keys
IFB
Keys
oo
o
1
oo
2
3
1
oo
oo
2
3
Program Source configured on DAK 1 is removed from IFB 1
Program Source configured on DAK 2 is added to IFB 1
Monitoring a Program Source:
Program
Sources Keys
oo
IFB
Keys
o
1
oo
2
3
1
oo
oo
2
3
oo
oo
2
3
↓
Deselect IFB DAK 1
Program
Sources Keys
oo
1
IFB
Keys
o
oo
2
o
3
1
Red LED on IFB DAK 1 is off
IFB 1 is no longer monitored
Panel is not talking to IFB 1
Green LED on IFB 1 and Program Source DAK 2 remain lit
↓
Press and hold Program Source DAK 3
Program
Sources Keys
IFB
Keys
oo
oo
1
2
o
3
oo
oo
oo
1
2
3
Program Source configured to DAK 3 is monitored by panel
Red LED on Program Source DAK 3 is lit
Green LED on Program Source DAK 2 is off
Green LED on IFB DAK 1 is off
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page 197
Panel User Guide
Page 198
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
INDEX
Numerics
H
2RU LCD Key Panel .................................... 91
4017 Intelligent control panel .................... 179
4025 Router control panel ......................... 188
4294 - Desktop Control Panel .................... 50
Headset Select Pushbutton 6, 11, 15, 22, 29, 35,
A
Headset Socket ........ 6, 11, 17, 18, 21, 30, 33
Alphanumeric LCD Display 20, 26, 32, 38, 52, 58
Alphanumeric LED Display ......................... 14
ASSN, LCD key panel ................................ 175
Auxiliary Volume Control 7, 11, 20, 27, 32, 39, 44,
I
48, 53, 59, 70, 78, 85, 93, 100, 108, 127, 135, 143
Auxiliary Volume Control and Associated LED
17, ..............................................................18, 30
C
41, 45, 49, 52, 58, 69, 78, 85, 92, 100, 108, 127,
135, ................................................................143
Headset Select Pushbutton and Associated LED
.............................................................. 17, 18, 30
IFB Router Operation .................................194
Indicator LED ..............................17, 18, 30, 65
Info Pushbutton .............21, 27, 33, 39, 53, 59
Info Pushbuttonand Associated LED 17, 18, 30
INFO, LCD key panel .................................178
Intelligent Control Panel .............................162
Intelligent Control Panel Features ............162
Call Reject Pushbutton 22, 28, 34, 40, 54, 60
Call Reject Pushbutton and Associated LED 17,
L
....................................................................18, 30
LCD Extension Panels ...............................148
LCD key panel switch colours .....................96
LCD key switch colour, 4212 panel ... 81, 146
Level Control Pushbutton ... 15, 29, 41, 55, 61
Listen Tally LED 5, 10, 14, 20, 26, 32, 38, 48, 52,
CALL, LCD key panel ................................ 177
Contrast Control ......................... 28, 40, 55, 61
Control Panel Overview ................................. 2
Cover Over Rack Mounting Points 17, 18, 30
Crosspoint Level Control 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 35,
41, 55, 61, 68, 76, 83, 91, 98, 106, 125, 133, 141,
149, ................................................................ 156
CURRENT MAP NAME ............ 21, 27, 33, 39
D
Date and time of last download 22, 28, 34, 40
Description ..................... 21, 27, 34, 39, 53, 60
Designation Strip ............ 6, 10, 44, 48, 65, 67
Desktop control panel ............................50, 56
DIAL Mode ................................................... 162
Dial mode, LCD Key Panel ....................... 164
DIR, LCD key panel .................................... 176
Direct Access Key ...............17, 18, 19, 30, 31
Direct Access Key (DAK) 4, 8, 12, 19, 25, 31, 37,
.................................................................... 58, 67
Loudspeaker Aperture ..................... 17, 18, 30
Loudspeaker Cut ...........................................71
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton 15, 23, 29, 35, 41,
45, ....................................................... 49, 55, 61
Loudspeaker Cut Pushbutton and Associated
LED ..................................................... 17, 18, 30
M
Main Volume Control 6, 10, 20, 27, 32, 39, 44, 48,
E
52, 59, 70, 79, 86, 93, 101, 109, 128, 136, 144, 158
Main Volume Control and Associated LED 17,
18, ....................................................................30
Map Name ...................................21, 27, 33, 39
Microphone Mute and Associated LED 17, 18,
30
Microphone Mute Pushbutton 6, 10, 15, 20, 26,
32, 38, 44, 48, 52, 59, 69, 77, 85, 92, 100, 108, 126,
........................................................ 134, 142, 157
Microphone Socket ......................4, 17, 18, 30
Engineering diagnostic information 22, 28, 34,
N
43, 47, 51, 57, 64, 66, 71, 79, 87, 94, 102, 110, 128,
............................................... 136, 144, 151, 158
Directory Port Number . 21, 27, 33, 39, 53, 59
40, ....................................................... 53, 54, 60
Extension Panels .......................................... 62
F
Four Character Mnemonic 21, 27, 34, 39, 53, 59
NETWORK INFORMATION 21, 27, 34, 39, 53,
60
P
PAGE, LCD key panel ................................177
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page i
PANEL POSITION ........ 21, 27, 33, 39, 53, 59
PD4203 - Level Control Panel (1RU) ........ 63
PD4203R-Level Control Panel ................... 62
PD4206 - 20 Key Extension Panel (1RU) . 66
PD4206 DAK Operation .............................. 66
PD4206 Pushbutton Attributes ................... 67
PD4206R - 16 Key Extension Panel .......... 64
PD4206R DAK Operation ............................ 64
PD4206R Pushbutton Attributes ................ 65
PD4211 LCD Key Panel (1RU) .................. 68
PD4212 DAK Operation ............... 80, 88, 145
PD4212 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder
75, .................................................................... 83
PD4212 Pushbutton Attributes .... 80, 88, 145
PD4212R (revised) Front View ................... 75
PD4212R (revised) front View .................... 75
PD4212R Front View ................................... 75
PD4215 - 16 Key Control Panel (1RU) ....... 8
PD4215 DAK Operation ................................ 9
PD4215 Pushbutton Attributes ..................... 9
PD4215R - 16 Key Control Panel ................ 3
PD4215R (revised) - 16 Key Control Panel 3
PD4215R (revised) Front View ..................... 3
PD4215R DAK Operation .............................. 4
PD4215R Direct Access Key Indicator LED 5,
10, ...........................................14, 20, 26, 32, 38
PD4215R Front View ..................................... 3
PD4215R Pushbutton Attributes .................. 5
PD4217 - Intelligent Control Panel (1RU) 12,
179
PD4217 DAK Operation .............................. 13
PD4217 Pushbutton Attributes ................... 13
PD4221 DAK Operation .............................. 94
PD4221 LCD Key Panel (2RU) .................. 91
PD4221 Pushbutton Attributes ................... 95
PD4222 DAK Operation ............................ 110
PD4222 LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder
(2RU) ...................................................... 98, 106
PD4222 Pushbutton Attributes ................. 111
PD4222R DAK Operation .................. 102, 129
PD4222R Pushbutton Attributes ...... 103, 129
PD4222S Supervisor Key Panel ...... 114, 119
PD4224 - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU) . 24
PD4224 DAK Operation .............................. 25
PD4224 Pushbutton Attributes ................... 26
PD4224R - Intelligent Control Panel .......... 17
PD4224R (revised) Front View ................... 17
PD4224R DAK Operation ...................... 19, 31
PD4224R Pushbutton Attributes .......... 19, 31
PD4225 - Intelligent Control Panel (2RU) . 36
PD4225 - Router Control Panel ................ 188
PD4225 DAK Operation .............................. 37
PD4225 Pushbutton Attributes ................... 38
PD4225R - Intelligent Control Panel .......... 30
PD4225R DAK Operation ............................ 31
PD4225R Pushbutton Attributes ................ 31
Panel User Guide
Page ii
PD4226 - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU) ......46
PD4226 DAK Operation ...............................47
PD4226 Direct Access Key Indicator LED 48
PD4226 Pushbutton Attributes ....................47
PD4226R - 32 Key Control Panel (2RU) ...42
PD4226R DAK Operation ............................43
PD4226R Direct Access Key Indicator LED 44
PD4226R Pushbutton Attributes .................43
PD4230R DAK Operation ..........................151
PD4230R Half Width LCD Extension Panel 148,
.........................................................................155
PD4230R Pushbutton Attributes ...............152
PD4231R DAK Operation ..........................159
PD4231R Half Width LCD Control Panel 155
PD4231R Pushbutton Attributes ...............159
PD4232LCD Key Panel and Rotary Encoder
(3RU) .............................................................124
PD4232RBL Front View .............................124
PD4294 - Desktop Control Panel ...............56
PD4294 DAK Operation ...............................57
PD4294 Pushbutton Attributes ....................58
PD4294R DAK Operation ............................51
PD4294R Pushbutton Attributes .................51
PD4295MCI DAK Operation ......................137
PD4295MCI LCD Desktop Panel .............132
PD4295MCI Pushbutton Attributes ..........137
Pot Switch Operation 76, 84, 99, 107, 125, 133,
141, ....................................................... 150, 156
Programming Examples .................... 174, 196
R
Rack Mounting Screws .................... 17, 18, 30
Remote Audio Control (RAUD) .................188
Remote Key Assignment (RKEY) .............191
Reply Key 7, 11, 17, 18, 22, 29, 30, 35, 41, 45, 49,
.54, 61, 71, 79, 87, 94, 102, 110, 128, 136, 144
Rotary Encoder ..............................................15
Rotary LED Display .......................................14
Rotary Level Control .............................. 55, 61
S
Shift Pushbutton 14, 21, 27, 33, 39, 53, 59, 69, 77,
..........85, 92, 100, 108, 126, 134, 142, 151, 157
Shift Pushbutton and Associated LED 17, 18, 30
Soft Mode .....................................................166
Soft Mode, LCD Key Panel ........................175
Soft Pushbutton 14, 22, 28, 34, 40, 54, 60, 70, 78,
.......................... 85, 93, 100, 108, 127, 135, 143
Soft Pushbutton and Associated LED 17, 18, 30
Software version currently being run by panel
processor ........................22, 28, 34, 40, 54, 60
Supervisor panel, description ........... 114, 119
SYSTEM INFORMATION 22, 28, 34, 40, 53, 60
System resets, Supervisor panel ..... 118, 122
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
System to which panel is connected 21, 28, 34,
40, ..............................................................53, 60
Systems which exist on the network 21, 28, 34,
40, ..............................................................53, 60
T
Talk Tally LED 5, 10, 14, 26, 38, 48, 52, 58, 67
V
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) 17, 18, 30
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page iii
Panel User Guide
Page iv
Issue 1.4
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
WARRANTY
Vitec Group Communications (VGC) warrants that at the time of purchase, the equipment supplied
complies with any specification in the order confirmation when used under normal conditions, and is free
from defects in workmanship and materials during the warranty period.
VGC warrants to you that during the warranty period VGC, or any service company authorized by VGC,
will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in materials, design, and workmanship free of
charge by repairing, or should VGC in its discretion deem it necessary, replacing the product in
accordance with this limited warranty.
WARRANTY PERIOD
The product may consist of several parts, each covered by a different warranty period. The warranty
periods are:
•
Cables, accessories, components, and consumable items have a limited warranty of 90 days.
•
Headsets, handsets, microphones, and spare parts have a limited warranty of one year.
•
UHF wireless IFB products have a limited warranty of one year.
•
UHF wireless intercom systems have a limited warranty of three years.
• All other Clear-Com and Drake brand systems and products, including beltpacks, have a limited
warranty of two years.
The warranty starts at the time of the product’s original purchase. The warranty start date for contracts
which include installation and commissioning will commence from the date of the Site Acceptance Test
(SAT), or three months from purchase, whichever is sooner.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
To ensure complete and timely support to its customers, VGC’s User Support Center is staffed by
qualified technical personnel. Telephone and email technical support is offered worldwide by the User
Support Center.
The User Support Center is available to VGC’s customers during the full course of their warranty period.
Telephone support during the warranty period will be offered at no charge between 09:00 and 17:00
according to the customer’s local time zone.
In addition, for customers who purchase an Extended Warranty or Service Contract, 24-hour customer
support is offered immediately upon purchase of such agreement. For more information, contact your
authorized dealer, distributor, or sales representative.
Instructions for reaching our User Support Center are given below.
Telephone for Europe, Middle East and Africa +49 40 6688 4040
Telephone for the Americas and Asia: +1 510 496 6666
Email: vitec.support@AVC.de
Once the standard warranty period has expired, the User Support Center will continue to provide
telephone support if you have purchased an Extended Warranty or Service Contract. In these cases, you
will have access to telephone support 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
WARRANTY REPAIRS AND RETURNS
Before returning equipment for repair, contact a User Support Center to obtain a Return Material
Authorisation (RMA). Our representatives will give you instructions and addresses for returning your
equipment. You must ship the equipment at your expense, and the support center will return the
equipment at our expense.
For out-of-box failures, use the following contact information:
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page i
Europe, Middle East and Africa
Tel: +44 1223 815000 Email: customerservicesEMEA@vitecgroup.com
North America, Canada, Mexico, Caribbean & US Military
Tel: +1 510 496 6666 Email: customerservicesUS@vitecgroup.com
Asia Pacific & South America
Tel: +1 510 496 6666 Email: customerservicesAPAC@vitecgroup.com
VGC has the right to inspect the equipment and/or installation or relevant packaging.
NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS AND RETURNS
For items not under warranty, you must obtain a Return Material Authorisation (RMA) by contacting the
User Support Center. Our representatives will give you instructions and addresses for returning your
equipment.
You must pay all charges to have the equipment shipped to the support center and returned to you, in
addition to the costs of the repair.
EXTENDED WARRANTY
If you purchase an Extended Warranty, you are also given access free of charge to the User Support
Center 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
You can purchase an extended warranty at any time during the first two years of ownership of the
product. The purchase of an extended warranty extends to five years the warranty of any product offered
with a standard two-year warranty. The total warranty period will not extend beyond five years. Any
purchase of an extended warranty provides 24 x 7 customer support in addition to the warranty
immediately upon purchase of the warranty extension.
Note: Clear-Com does not offer warranty extensions on UHF wireless intercom systems, or on any
product with a 1-year or 90-day warranty.
SERVICE CONTRACT
VGC offers service contracts that provide 24 x 7 telephone support, advance replacements, training,
proactive maintenance, on-site visits, and no charge for repair or replacement of equipment. For more
information, contact your authorized dealer, distributor, or sales representative.
LIABILITY
The foregoing warranty is VGC’s sole and exclusive warranty. There are no other warranties (including
without limitation warranties for consumables and other supplies), or guarantees, expressed or implied
(including, without limitation, any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose), of any
nature whatsoever, whether arising in contract, tort, negligence of any degree, strict liability or otherwise,
with respect to the products or any part thereof delivered hereunder and/or with respect to any nonconformance or defect in any such product and/or part thereof delivered hereunder and/or with respect
to any non-conformance or defect in any such product and/or part thereof delivered hereunder, or any
other warranties or guarantees, including but not limited to any liability of VGC for any consequential and/
or incidental damages and/or losses (including loss of use, revenue, and/or profits). In any event, the
maximum extent of VGC’s liability to customer hereunder shall not under any circumstances exceed the
cost of repairing or replacing any part(s) found to be defective within the warranty period as aforesaid.
This warranty does not include damage to a product resulting from cause other than part defect and
malfunction. The VGC warranty does not cover any defect, malfunction, or failure caused beyond the
control of VGC, including unreasonable or negligent operation, abuse, accident, failure to follow
instructions in the manual, defective or improperly associated equipment, attempts at modification and
repair not approved by VGC, and shipping damage. Products with their serial numbers removed or
defaced are not covered by this warranty.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page ii
This warranty does not include defects arising from installation (when not performed by VGC), lightning,
power outages and fluctuations, air conditioning failure, improper integration with non-approved
components, defects or failures of customer furnished components resulting in damage to VGC provided
product.
VGC will be under no liability whatsoever for any loss, injury or damage (whether direct, indirect, or
consequential) howsoever arising including, but not by way of limitation, liability arising in negligence that
may be suffered in respect of the warranty or service agreement or the subject matter thereof. Indirect
or consequential loss or damage shall include any loss or damage in respect to any loss of profits or
income or business or use of whatsoever kind.
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page iii
4000 Digital Series II
STA0380
Issue 1.4
Panel User Guide
Page iv
Download PDF